Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
MARINE RADAR
MODEL
FCR-21x7
FCR-21x7-BB
FCR-28x7
www.furuno.com
Printed in Japan
A : JUL . 2006
K : JAN . 17, 2012
FCR-2807/2107
*00015804119*
*00015804119*
* 0 0 0 1 5 8 0 4 1 1 9 *
Important Notices
General
The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual. Wrong operation or
maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you see on your
display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment settings.
Save this manual for future reference.
Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will cancel the
warranty.
All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their respective holders.
Cd
Pb
Safety Instructions
WARNING
CAUTION
Warning, Caution
Mandatory Action
Prohibitive Action
WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be harmful,
particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close
distance. Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table
below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your
administration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution.
This is possible. Ask your FURUNO representive or dealer to provide this feature.
0.1m
0.1m
0.7m
0.4m
2.2m
1.5m
XN20AF
XN24AF
0.5m
0.2m
1.7m
1.0m
4.6m
3.3m
SN30AF
SN36AF
XN20AF
XN24AF
SN36AF
0.1m
0.1m
0.4m
0.2m
-
0.7m
1.0m
0.5m
0.2m
2.4m
2.0m
5.6m
3.4m
1.9m
FCR-2117(-BB)
FCR-2817
MAF1565N*2,
RTR-078/A MG4010*2,
MAF1565N*3
XN20AF
XN24AF
FCR-2127(-BB)
FCR-2827
RTR-079/A MG5436
FCR-2137S(-BB)
FCR-2837S
RTR-080
FCR-2827W
RTR-081/A MG5436
FCR-2837SW
RTR-082
*1 XN12AF:
MG5223F
10W/m 2
Antenna
MG5223F
*1
50W/m 2
Transceiver Magnetron
Radar model
100W/m
120 cm, XN20AF: 19 8cm, XN24AF: 243 cm, SN30AF: 309 cm, SN36AF: 377 cm
MG4010: RTR-078
*3 MAF1565N: RTR-078/A
*2 MAF1425B,
ii
Safety Instructions
iii
Safety Instructions
iv
Table of Contents
Foreword..................................................................................................................................................xv
System Configuration .......................................................................................................................... xvii
1.
2.
Table of Contents
vi
Table of Contents
4.
5.
vii
Table of Contents
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
6.
7.
viii
Table of Contents
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
8.
ix
Table of Contents
8.5
8.6
9.
Table of Contents
xi
Table of Contents
xii
Table of Contents
xiii
Table of Contents
xiv
Foreword
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FCR-21x7(-BB), FCR-28x7 Series Marine Radar. We are
confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable
marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents
and dealers.
This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no
machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read
and follow the recommended procedures for operation and maintenance.
Features
This radar series meets the requirements in IEC62388 (Marine navigation and radiocommunication equipment and
systems Shipborne radar Performance requirements, method of testing and required test results) and IMO
MSC.192(79), IMO Resolution A.817(19), and IEC 61174. This radar displays radar targets, electronic charts, nav
lines, Tracked Target (TT) data, AIS targets and other navigation data on a high-resolution 19-inch (FCR-21x7) or
20.1-inch display (FCR-21x7) or 23.1-inch display (FCR-28x7). Blackbox configuration also is available in the
FCR-21x7 series.
The main features of this series are
Radar, ECDIS and chart radar modes. (The chart radar mode is optional, and it does not meet the criteria for
navigation aid for Japanese flag vessels as defined by Japanese law.)
The FCR-21x7(-BB), FCR-28x7 series consists of the following models and configurations:
Model
FCR-2117
FCR-2127
FCR-2817
FCR-2827
FCR-2117-BB
FCR-2127-BB
FCR-2827W
FCR-2137S
FCR-2837S
FCR-2837SW
FCR-2137S-BB
Frequency
Band
Display
20.1"
23.1"
X-band
Local supply
23.1"
20.1"
23.1"
S-band
Output Power
10 kW
25 kW
10 kW
25 kW
10 kW
25 kW
25 kW
Transceiver
location
In antenna unit
Transceiver unit
In antenna unit
30 kW
Local supply
Transceiver unit
In antenna unit
Continuous monitoring of ships position through multi-sensor Kalman filter processing using GPS, DPGS,
SDME
Route planning and route monitoring facilities
Wide variety of warning facilities contribute to safer and more efficient navigation
Grounding warnings, safe depth contours
Chart database loaded and updated using CD-ROMs
Tracked Target (TT) data and AIS transponder to aid collision avoidance
Sharing of route with ECDIS
xv
Foreword
Program Number
The program number appears at the right-hand side of the display.
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
Program no.*
Device
Program no.
Chart Processor
06.xx
Radar Processor
03.xx
xx=Minor modification
Date of Modification
10/2010
08/2010
Description
Suppress interference transmitted by other radars. Interference
received simultaneously from many radars can be difficult to
reduce.
Section
2.10
Echo stretch
2.17
Echo averaging
The radar samples echoes with each scan. Targets that show a
large change with each scan are judged as clutter and are
reduced to display only echoes from legitimate targets.
2.18
Noise rejector
2.23
62N
Cursor position
indicated
Cursor position
indicated
60N
135E
96 nm
LAT
139E
OS position
xvi
System Configuration
FCR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827
Radiator
XN-20AF (6 ft)
XN-24AF (8 ft)
ANTENNA UNIT
Transceiver
RSB-096-078/A
RSB-097-078/A
RSB-096-079/A
RSB-097-079/A
Junction Box
Junction Box
RADAR
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-016
440 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
Transformer Unit
RU-1803
100-115 VAC/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
Gyro Converter
GC-10
AD-100
Switching HUB
HUB-100
100-230 VAC
1
2
FCR-21x7 series
FCR-28x7 series
MONITOR UNIT*
MU-1901
MU-201CE1
MU-231CE2
MU-2312
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-020 or
RCU-015FEA
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-016
Sub Display
Alarm
CHART
PROCESSOR UNIT
EC-1000C
100-230 VAC
HUB-100
100-230 VAC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
LOG
AIS
ALARM
24 VDC
100-230 VAC
: Standard
: Option
: Dockyard supply
VDR or
Ext. Display
PC keyboard
24 VDC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
Category of Units
Antenna Unit: Exposed to weather
All other units: Protected from weather
* These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190,
MU-201CE for CAT 2C and CAT 2HC, MU-231CE, MU-231
for CAT 1C and CAT 1HC. If a different monitor is to be used, its
effective diameter must meet the applicable Category requirements:
CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see
its manuals.
ALARM
B ADAPTER
ALARM
24 VDC
xvii
System Configuration
FCR-2137S(-BB)/2837S
Radiator
SN30AF/
SN36AF
Performance Monitor
PM-51
Chassis
RSB-098/099
RSB-100/101/102 (for HSC)
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT PSU-007
ANTENNA UNIT
Junction Box
220 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
200 VAC, 3, 50 Hz
440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
380 VAC, 3, 50 Hz
For HSC spec
220 VAC, 3, 50 Hz
220 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
440 VAC, 3, 60 Hz
Junction Box
110 VAC, 3,
RU-5693
60 Hz
220 VAC, 3,
RU-6522
50 Hz
440 VAC, 3,
RU-5466-1
50 Hz
Heading Sensor (IEC-61162-2)
440 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
Transformer Unit
RU-1803
RADAR
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-016
Gyro Converter
GC-10
Gyrocompass
100-115 VAC/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
AD-100
Switching HUB
HUB-100
Alarm
100-230VAC
FCR-21x7 series
FCR-28x7 series
MOPNTOR UNIT*
MU-1901
MU-201CE1
MU-231CE2
MU-2312
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-020 or
RCU-015FEA
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-016
1
2
Sub Display
CHART
PROCESSOR UNIT
EC-1000C
100-230 VAC
HUB-100
100-230VAC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
LOG
AIS
ALARM
24VDC
VDR or
Ext. Display
100-230 VAC
: Standard
: Option
: Dockyard supply
PC keyboard
24VDC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
ALARM
Category of Units
Antenna Unit: Exposed to weather
All other units: Protected from weather
* These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190,
MU-201CE for CAT 2C and CAT 2HC, MU-231CE, MU-231
for CAT 1C and CAT 1HC. If a different monitor is to be used, its
effective diameter must meet the applicable Category requirements:
CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see
its manuals.
xviii
B ADAPTER
ALARM
24 VDC
System Configuration
FCR-2827W
Radiator
XN-20AF (6 ft)
XN-24AF (8 ft)
ANTENNA UNIT
Waveguide
WRJ-9 or FR-9
RU-3305
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
RTR-081/A
Junction Box
Junction Box
RADAR
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-016
440 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
Transformer Unit
RU-1803
100-115 VAC/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
Gyro Converter
GC-10
AD-100
Switching HUB
HUB-100
Alarm
Sub Display
100-230 VAC
MONITOR UNIT*
MU-231CE
MU-231
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-020 or
RCU-015FEA
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-016
CHART
PROCESSOR UNIT
EC-1000C
100-230 VAC
HUB-100
100-230 VAC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
LOG
AIS
ALARM
24 VDC
100-230 VAC
: Standard
: Option
: Dockyard supply
VDR or
Ext. Display
PC keyboard
24 VDC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
Category of Units
Antenna Unit: Exposed to weather
All other units: Protected from weather
* These monitors have been approved by the IMO, CAT 1C and CAT
1HC. If a different monitor is to be used, its effective diameter must
meet the applicable Category requirements:
CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see
its manuals.
ALARM
B ADAPTER
ALARM
24 VDC
xix
System Configuration
FCR-2837SW
SN30AF/SN36AF
Performance
Monitor PM-51
RSB104
RSB105
Power for De-icer
AC100V, 1, 50/60 Hz
AC100/115/220/230V
1, 50/60 Hz
RU-3305
TRANSCEIVER UNIT
RTR-082
AC220V, 3, 60Hz
AC200V, 3, 50Hz
AC440V, 3, 60Hz
AC380V, 3, 50Hz
AC110V, 3,
60 Hz
AC220V, 3,
50 Hz
AC 440V, 3,
50 Hz
Junction Box
RU-5693
Junction Box
RU-6522
RU-5466-1
440 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
Transformer Unit
RU-1803
RADAR
PROCESSOR UNIT
RPU-016
Gyrocompass
100-115 VAC/
220-230 VAC,
1, 50-60 Hz
AD-100
Switching HUB
HUB-100
Alarm
Sub Display
100-230VAC
MONITOR UNIT*
MU-231CE
MU-231
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-020 or
RCU-015FEA
CONTROL UNIT
RCU-016
CHART
PROCESSOR UNIT
EC-1000C
100-230 VAC
HUB-100
100-230VAC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
LOG
AIS
ALARM
24VDC
VDR or
Ext. Display
100-230 VAC
: Standard
: Option
: Dockyard supply
PC keyboard
24VDC
EPFS
LAN ADAPTER
EC-1010
Category of Units
Antenna Unit: Exposed to weather
All other units: Protected from weather
* These monitors have been approved by the IMO, CAT 1C and CAT
1HC. If a different monitor is to be used, its effective diameter must
meet the applicable Category requirements:
CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher
CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher
For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see
its manuals.
xx
ALARM
B ADAPTER
ALARM
24 VDC
1. Operational Overview
1.1
1.1.1
Control units
Two types of control units are available: Control Unit RCU-020 (full keyboard) and Control Unit RCU-015 (palm
control).
Scrollwheel
Left button
BRILL
OFF
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
OFF
ON
1
HL
OFF
2
EBL
OFFSET
MODE
F2
4
OFF
CENTER
5
CU/TM
RESET
6
INDEX
LINE
F4
7
VECTOR
TIME
8
VECTOR
MODE
9
TARGET
LIST
EBL
F1
F3
Right button
ON
3
VRM
MENU
ACQ
TARGET
DATA
RANGE
STBY
TX
CANCEL
TRAILS
0
BRILL
ENTER
MARK
ALARM
ACK
TARGET
CANCEL
Trackball
Trackball
module
Description
Turns the system on/off. (This control does not switch the display on/off.)
Adjusts display brilliance. (FURUNO monitor only)
Adjust active VRM.
Activates and displays VRM 1 if none is displayed or VRM2 is active.
Activates and displays VRM 2 if VRM1 is active.
Inactivates and erases VRM 1 if both VRMs are displayed.
Inactivates and erases VRM 2 if VRM1 is active.
Adjusts active EBL.
Activates and displays EBL1 if none is displayed or EBL 2 is active.
Activates and displays EBL 2 if EBL1 is active.
User programmable macro keys.
Alarm acknowledgement for alerts generated by chart, navigation or steering calculation.
Toggles radar between standby and TX.
Adjusts radar gain.
Reduces rain clutter.
Reduces sea clutter.
Temporarily erases heading line.
Shifts EBL point of origin/returns point of origin to screen center.
Selects presentation mode.
Locates own ship on-screen position where desired; returns own ship position to screen
center.
1-1
1. Operational Overview
CU/TM RESET
INDEX LINE
VECTOR TIME
VECTOR MODE
TARGET LIST
CANCEL TRAILS
ENTER MARK
MENU
RANGE
ACQ
TARGET DATA
TARGET CANCEL
In the true motion mode, own ship is shifted 75% of the display radius in the stern
direction. In the course-up mode, the heading line is returned to 0.
Enables/disables parallel index lines.
Sets vector time (length) for TT (TT).
Selects vector mode, true or relative.
Display TT AIS target list.
Sets echo trail time. Also functions to cancel data input.
Terminate input in menu; display MARK dialog box.
Opens/closes main menu.
Selects radar range.
Acquires trackball-selected TT.
Displays data for trackball-selected TT and AIS.
Cancels tracking on trackball-selected TT and AIS.
Right button
F1
Trackball
F2
F3
F4
1-2
Trackball
Module
1. Operational Overview
1.1.2
DVD-ROM drive
1.2
Normally, leave the power switch at the rear of the chart processor on and control power on/off with the POWER
key on a control unit. Note that the display unit is powered independently.
After power is applied, the Windows program starts up and about one minute later the bearing scale appears. The
radar then goes into three minutes of warm-up time to warm the magnetron, which transmits radar pulses. The timer
counts the time remaining for warm-up. When the timer has reached 0:00, the indication "ST-BY" appears at the
screen center, meaning the radar is now ready to transmit pulses.
In the stand-by condition, markers, rings, map, charts, etc. are not shown. Further, neither TT nor AIS is active.
If the power is reapplied after the equipment was in the ECDIS mode, Windows starts up and about two minutes
later the ECDIS display appears.
Parameters set on the menus are stored in a non-volatile memory (hard disk) and are preserved when the power is
turned off.
Note: If the ambient temperature is less than 0C (32F) when the power is applied, nothing appears on the display.
This is because the heater is warming the chart processor unit. The display appears in approx. 10 minutes.
Transmitter ON
After the power is turned on and the magnetron has warmed
up, ST-BY appears at the screen center, meaning the radar is
ready to transmit radar pulses. You can transmit by pushing
the STBY/TX key on the full keyboard, or use the trackball
to select the TX STBY box at the bottom left corner of the
display then push the left button. The label at the left-hand
side of the guidance area at the bottom right corner of the
screen changes from TX to STBY.
The radar is initially set to previously used range and pulse
length. Other settings such as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs
and menu option selections are also set to previous settings.
TX
STBY
STBY
Guidance
box
TX STBY box
The STBY/TX key (or TX STBY box) toggles the radar between STBY and TRANSMIT state. The antenna stops
in stand-by and rotates in transmit. The magnetron ages with time resulting in a reduction of output power.
Therefore, it is highly recommended that the radar be set to stand-by when not used for an extended period of time.
1-3
1. Operational Overview
Picture freeze
If the picture freezes the picture is not updated. 30 seconds after the picture freezes, the buzzer sounds, the ALARM
ACK key blinks and alarm contact signal is output. Reset the power to restore normal operation.
1.3
Monitor Brilliance
The brilliance of the entire screen should be adjusted according to lighting conditions. Monitor brilliance should be
adjusted before adjusting relative brilliance levels on the BRILL menu.
Note: The brilliance of a commercial monitor cannot be adjusted from the radar. See the owners manual of the
commercial monitor for how to adjust its brilliance.
16/16
2. Spin the scrollwheel downward to increase brilliance or spin it upward to decrease brilliance. The length of the
brilliance bar increases or decreases with operation of the scrollwheel.
Note: If nothing appears on the screen at power-up when using Control Unit RCU-015 (palm control) or when the
radar is in stand-by, push and hold down any key except the power switch for four seconds to automatically set up
for medium display brilliance.
1-4
1. Operational Overview
1.4
Menu Operation
There are two main menus, radar/chart radar and ECDIS, and the one currently available depends on operating
mode. You can access the main menu from the full keyboard or by using the trackball. In later sections only the
procedure for operation by trackball is given. In the example below the menu operating procedure for operation on
the radar/chart radar main menu is presented.
1. Do one of the following depending on the control
unit you are using.
Control unit RCU-020: Push the MENU key
to show the Main menu.
Control unit RCU-015 (or RCU-020): Use the
trackball to select the MENU box at the right
side of the screen then push the left button to
show the Main menu, shown left.
2. Use the trackball to select desired menu then push
the scrollwheel to open the menu selected. For
example, select Picture to show the PICTURE
dialog box, shown left.
3. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the setting of
the item you wish to change. The setting changes
color to indicate it is selected. (The color depends on
the color arrangement in use.)
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select setting desired then
push it or the left button to confirm setting.
5. Push the right button to close the menu. (Several
pushes may be necessary depending on the menu
used. In some cases you will click the Close window
button (X) at the top right corner on the menu.)
Main menu
1-5
1. Operational Overview
3. Select Characters then push the left button. Your screen should now look something like the one below. (In case
of longitude, E and W replace N and S.)
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate polarity then push the scrollwheel. The polarity is changed and the
window is closed.
Put the cursor to the right of the digit you want to delete then push the right button.
2.
Delete is selected; push the scrollwheel to delete the alphanumeric selected. The character is deleted and the
window is closed.
1-6
1. Operational Overview
1.5
The trackball module, as shown on pages 1-1 and 1-2, consists of the trackball, right and left mouse buttons and the
scrollwheel.
1.5.1
The scrollwheel
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(WT)
Information
area
The procedure below shows you how to change the presentation mode from North Up TM to Course Up RM.
1. Put the cursor on the text at the location shown by "1." in the figure above, and the color of the text changes
from current color to green.
2. Use the scrollwheel to scroll options until Course Up RM appears. As you scroll, the color of the text changes
to magenta, blue or green depending on the Palette in use.
3. Push the scrollwheel to confirm your selection, and the color of the text becomes green. When you move the
cursor away from the text, the color of the text returns to its original color.
1-7
1. Operational Overview
1.5.2
The buttons can be used to call menus or functions on the display. At the lower right corner of the display the mouse
functions area displays available function or menu name, as shown in the figure below. Spin the scrollwheel to
choose menu or function desired, then push the left button, scrollwheel or right button as appropriate to access the
menu or function desired. Available menus and functions depend on cursor location
Scrollwheel
Left button
Right button
xx.xx xx.xx
F1
F2
F3
F4
Ref Mark
Info
Tgt Acquire
Info
Tgt Cancel /L=All
Info
Nav Marks
Chart
Display Info (Note 2)
Primary Display
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
Symbol Display Info
Left button
Menu
RangeTM/CU Reset
ECDIS mode
Scrollwheel
Info
Info
Info
Right button
Chart Menu
Range+
Ship Offcenter
Event
Info
Info
Info
Info
Info
Info
MOB
Cursor Menu
Activate Scroll
Nav Marks
Standard Display
Note 1: "-" shown when presentation mode is other than North-up or Course-up.
Note 2: Not shown in radar mode.
1-8
1. Operational Overview
1.6
Operation Modes
1.6.1
There are some limitations when using the system in the "chart radar" mode. Below are the conditions where the
"chart radar" mode may be used:
1) Range in "chart radar" mode is between 0.125 nm and 24 nm.
If you change from "radar" mode to "chart radar" mode when the range is 24 nm or less, the range is not
changed. And if range is more than 24 nm the system automatically selects the 24 nm range.
2) Presentation mode is "course-up RM", "north-up RM" and "north-up TM" in "chart radar" mode.
If you change from "radar" mode to "chart radar" mode when the presentation mode is "head-up RM", the
system automatically changes the presentation mode to "north-up TM".
1.6.2
At the top of the screen are the operating mode boxes, Radar, Chart Radar, and in the ECIDS mode, ECDIS. To
switch modes put the cursor in the operating mode box then push the left button until desired mode name is
displayed in the box.
1-9
1. Operational Overview
1.7
Hot keys F1-F4 are provided to call a desired function/menu when pushed.
You can select desired function/menu from a predefined list. To select desired function/menu for each key, do the
following:
1. Spin the scrollwheel until Menu/Info/Chart Menu appears in
the guidance area.
2. Push the left button.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select Initial Settings then push the
scrollwheel.
4. Put the cursor on the triangle in the menu to show the Initial
Settings menu.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to select Function keys, then push the
scrollwheel. The menu shown right appears.
6. Check Enable changes.
7. Put the cursor on the box for F1, F2, F3 or F4 as appropriate
and spin the scrollwheel to select desired function or menu.
Enable changes
Item
Radar, Radar Chart Mode
ALARM ACK
CHART MENU
CHART DISPLAY
SENSORS
MENU
STANDARD DISPLAY
SYMBOL DISPLAY
RANGE+
RANGEINITIAL SETTINGS
ECDIS Mode
ALARM ACK
CHART MENU
CHART DISPLAY
SENSORS
MENU
STANDARD DISPLAY
SYMBOL DISPLAY
TM/CU RESET
TOGGLE SHIP CENTER
RANGE+
RANGEINITIAL SETTINGS
Content
Acknowledge alarm generated by this chart radar.
Open chart menu.
Open chart setting dialog box.
Open sensor setting dialog box.
Open main menu.
Restore standard display.
Show symbol display dialog box.
Shrink chart.
Enlarge chart.
Show initial settings dialog box.
Acknowledge alarm generated by this chart radar.
Open chart menu.
Open chart setting dialog box.
Open sensor setting dialog box.
Open main menu.
Restore standard display.
Show symbol display dialog box.
Return own ship to screen center in true motion and course-up modes.
Toggle own ship position between screen center and cursor location.
Shrink chart.
Enlarge chart.
Show initial settings dialog box.
1-10
1. Operational Overview
1.8
Geodetic Datum
This chart radar uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Positioning devices connected to
this equipment must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO require that a chart radar must give an alert if the datum of a
positioning device is not the WGS-84. In practice this is impossible, because the standard used by positioning
devices (IEC 61162, previously NMEA 0183) does not include a datum message. Consequently, the classification
societies only approve a positioning device interfaced with the chart radar where datum cannot be changed (i.e., is
always WGS-84).
Note: The ability to check datum of position is a relatively new feature for position receivers. It was introduced in
standard IEC 61162-1 Ed2, published July 2000. Only an EPFS (for example GPS or DGPS) that has "IEC 61162-1
Ed 2 (2000-7)" indicated in its type approval certificate can support the chart radar to detect datum mismatch.
This system allows the user to change viewed datum. This selection of the datum does not change anything inside
the system for navigation calculation processes or for electronic sea chart display processes. But it changes the
numerical values of positions displayed on the chart radar display into the user-chosen datum. This is very useful,
especially if you like to plot positions from the chart radar on a traditional paper chart.
1.9
If the EBL and VRM cannot be controlled from a control unit, use the NAV Marks dialog box. To show this box,
spin the scrollwheel to show ---/Info/Nav Marks in the guidance box then push the right button.
Set 1 page
REF point: Turn on/off the reference point on the electronic chart.
VRM: Turn on/off the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which is displayed around
the reference point.
EBL: Turn on/off EBL (Electronic Bearing Line), which extends from the reference
point.
Rings: Turn on/off the range rings, which circumscribe the reference point. The ring
interval depends on scale of displayed chart.
Info: Turn on/off numerical information about VRM, EBL and reference point. This
item is not displayed in the radar or radar chart mode.
REF point - Centered: Check to set center for your ship.
Set 2 page
Provides a second set of the items contained in set 1.
1-11
1. Operational Overview
1.9.1
EBL operation
1.9.2
VRM operation
1-12
1. Operational Overview
1.9.3
The reference point, shown on the display with a cross mark (if turned on in the Nav Marks dialog box), is a userspecified location to which measurements of range and bearing are referred. To choose the location for the reference
point, open the Nav Marks dialog box, check REF point, put the cursor at the location desired then push the right
button.
Centered reference point with Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
Reference point off centered with Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
1-13
1. Operational Overview
1.10
Ships Position
The operator can select navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the SENSORS
dialog box. For more information about navigation sensors, see Chapter 15.
Note: Availability of sensors to select from the SENSORS dialog box is limited to the position sensors connected to
the system.
1. Put the cursor on the Position field in the information area.
2. Push the right button, and the POSN page automatically appears.
SPD/CRS POSN
NM
DR
kn
DGPS-1st
kn
kn
LORAN Off
kn
3. Select desired navigation sensors. Spin the scrollwheel to select Position sensors (GPS(s)) either Primary or
Secondary then push the scrollwheel.
4. If no Position sensor is selected or no valid position is available, then you can enter position manually, in the
"Deadrec" field.
5. Click the Close window button (X) to close the SENSORS dialog box.
1-14
1. Operational Overview
1.11
Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
2.
3.
4.
Put the cursor on the small triangle in the upper left corner of the Initial Settings dialog box to show the Initial
Settings menu. Spin the scrollwheel to select Operation then push the scrollwheel to open the Operation menu.
Operation menu
5.
Set each item as appropriate, referring to the table below for details.
6.
Description
Options
Key Beep
Wheel Drive
Alarm Level
TTG Display
1-15
1. Operational Overview
1.12
Alerts Description
When error is detected, the appropriate alert indication appears (in red or yellow) and the audio alert sounds. Silence
the audio alert with the ALARM ACK key or select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button. The error
indication remains on the display until the reason for the alert is removed.
Alerts description
Message no.
Message
Alert category
Description
100
RadOv No Headline
Warning
No heading signal
101
RadOv No Azimuth
Warning
102
RadOv No Trigger
Warning
No trigger signal
103
RadOv No Video
Warning
No video signal
108
Watch Alarm
Warning
705
Gyro Error
Warning
708
Log Error
Warning
709
Warning
710
Warning
711
Warning
712
Position Eq Error
Warning
738
Datum mismatch
Warning
764
Warning
771
Warning
860
Safety Contour
Alarm
874
Anchor Watch
Warning
Refer to section 4.15 TT Alerts for TT alerts, section 5.17 AIS Alerts for AIS alerts.
1-16
1. Operational Overview
1.13
Charts
S57 ENC ed. 3 vector charts or CM-93 vector charts may be used.
1.14
Route Monitor
A route created by ECDIS can be overlaid on the radar and chart radar pictures. There are two ways to display the
route in this modes:
- Stand-alone mode: Use ECDIS mode-created route
- Route share mode: Use ECDIS route received via an ECDIS unit connected to the network
Stand-alone mode
1. Use the trackball to select the Route selection box at the upper part of the display.
Route: Not selected (Route selection box)
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select desired route for monitoring. Route planning must be done in the ECDIS
mode.
For more information about route planning and monitoring, see Chapter 10 How to Plan Routes and Chapter 11
How to Monitor Routes.
Route share mode
Route cannot be created in this mode. Further, route to monitor cannot be selected. ECDIS mode created route is
displayed however it cannot be selected for monitoring. On an ECDIS unit connected to the network, open the route
from Plan Route. Select Exchange with monitored from the menu, or open the route directly with Monitor route.
Then, the route is displayed on the ECDIS screen as well as radar and chart radar.
Note: To receive route information from an ECDIS unit in the network, that ECDIS must be set up to transfer route
information. For further details, contact your dealer.
1-17
1. Operational Overview
1.15
The HUB-100 provides switching for a radar processor and chart processor unit, using an Ethernet interface
(100BASE-TX/10BASE-T). LEDs display link/activity, mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) and collision states. No
operation is required of the user. Simply turn on the AC power source for the Switching Hub to power it.
LED display
The LEDs on the top of the unit light, flash or go off according to equipment state. When the equipment is powered
all LEDs light and go off.
FDx/Col
100M
1-18
Status
Lit
Off
Lit
Off
Flashing
Lit
Off
Flashing
Lit
Off
Meaning
Equipment powered
Equipment off
Connection with terminal normal
Connection with terminal disconnected
Data TX or RX
Full-duplex
Half-duplex
Collision
100 Mbps connection
10 Mbps connection
2. Radar Operation
2.1
Display Indications
2.1.1
Radar mode
TRIAL MANEUVER Box
Cursor Position, TTG and R/B to Cursor
REF point
GAIN setting
A/C SEA setting
A/C RAIN setting
TUNING setting
Picture Box
PULSELENGTH Box
ANTENNA Box
PRESENTATION Mode
RANGE Box
MODE Box
NM
/ 0.5
Radar
REF point
CCRP
Head Up RM
*1
350 000
340
CHART RA X-BAND
PULSE M1
PICTURE 1
IR 2
ES 2
EAV OFF
310
AUTO
RAIN 3
010
030
Marker
320
80
0
0
Rain MAN
Tune AUTO
0
3440. 649 N
13518. 303 E
020
330 Heading
Set Box,
DRIFT Box
Gain
Sea MAN
SET 000. 0T
DRIFT 0. 0kn
040
Heading Line
050
TRIAL OFF
060
070
290
Cursor
No. 1
EBL
270
250
000.0
0.00
NM
BRILL 1
HL
OFF EBL1
TX
STB EBL2
100
No. 2 EBL
Stern Mark
230
210
200
190
180 170
160
5954.097'N
02459.582'E
DGPS
To WPT
Dist WOP
NM
Time
Next WP
Next
Turn rad
NM
Turn rate
/min
UserChart
Notes
10 APR 2009 10:28
LOCAL (UTC + 03:00)
5952.031'N
13545.365'E
5.476 NM 91.5
TT AUTO
> AIS DISP
MAN
ALL
T VECT(G)
5 min
Predictor
30 s
PASTPOSN T 12min
CPA 10.0NM
30min
CPA AUTO act FILT
Lost TGT alarm FILT
SINGLE xx.xx xx.xx
DROP2
90.7T 0.742NM
No. 2 EBL
AZ2
150
DROP1
TGT
LIST
AZ1
140
220
12/16
Watch
11:28
120
WATCH Box
130
North Mark
046.0
17.3 kn
0.8 kn
048.7
17.4 kn
110
No. 2 VRM
240
ON
+
090
No.1 VRM
PI 1
080
Drop
Mark
260
(CALC)
(POSN)
(POSN)
(POSN)
Route: HELSINKI
Plan Speed
30.0 kn
MENU Plan
202.9
Route
217.9
Symb CH LIM
195 m
DISP Off track
< 0.9 NM
Outside channel
MENU Box
Acquistion
Zone
HDG
SPD
SB
COG
SOG
TTG 312.3R
00:11 1.864 NM WGS84
300
280
System Status
(Sector rotates clockwise
to confirm system is working.)
NM VRM2
>3.682NM<
5.221NM
No. 2 VRM
TM
Res
Heading
Speed
Transversal speed
Course over ground
Speed over ground
Position
Datum
Source of Position*
Route Data Box
WPT Data Box
Alarm
acknowledge Guidance area
No. 1 EBL
No. 1 VRM
TX/STBY Box
HL OFF Box
w/TTG data
BRILL, COLOR Box
*1
PI (Index Line) Box
To adjust, put arrow
-PI orientation
on setting and left-click.
-PI interval
(Current button,
scrollwheel function)
Viewing distance
The nominal viewing distances for the radar display units are as follows:
- MU-190: 1020 mm
- MU-231: 1200 mm
- MU-201CE: 1080 mm
- MU-231CE: 1200 mm
2-1
2. Radar Operation
2.1.2
Chart
Radar
REF point
CCRP
Course Up RM
CHART RA X-BAND
PULSE M1
PICTURE 1
IR 2
ES 2
EAV OFF
310
AUTO
RAIN 3
340
350 000
DRIFT 0. 0kn
010
020
030
330
320
Gain
Sea MAN
Rain MAN
Tune AUTO
040
80
0
0
0
3440. 649 N
13518. 303 E
050
TRIAL OFF
070
280
080
+
270
090
260
100
Chart
Status
250
110
240
PI 1
ON
000.0
0.00
NM
BRILL 1
HL
OFF EBL1
TX
STB EBL2
140
12/16
210
150
200
190
180 170
160
DROP1
91.7 T 0.765NM
2-2
TGT
LIST
130
220
5954.097'N
02459.582'E
DGPS
AZ1
AZ2
To WPT
Dist WOP
NM
Time
Next WP
Next
Turn rad
NM
Turn rate
/min
UserChart
Notes
10 APR 2009 10:28
LOCAL (UTC + 03:00)
5952.031'N
13545.365'E
5.476 NM 91.5
TT AUTO
> AIS DISP
MAN
ALL
T VECT(G)
5 min
Predictor
30 s
PASTPOSN T 12min
CPA 10.0NM
30min
CPA AUTO act FILT
Lost TGT alarm FILT
SINGLE xx.xx xx.xx
NM VRM2
>3.682NM<
5.221NM
DROP2
Chart
DISP
Watch
11:28
120
230
046.0
17.3 kn
0.8 kn
048.7
17.4 kn
Route: HELSINKI
Plan Speed
30.0 kn
MENU Plan
202.9
Route
217.9
Symb CH LIM
195 m
DISP Off track
< 0.9 NM
Outside channel
060
290
Coast
Line Only
(CALC)
(POSN)
(POSN)
(POSN)
TTG 312.3R
00:11 1.864 NM WGS84
300
Chart
Priority
HDG
SPD
SB
COG
SOG
TM
Res
2. Radar Operation
2.2
2.2.1
The tuning method can be selected with the TUNE box at the top of the screen.
1.
Use the trackball to select the TUNE box (Tune MAN or Tune AUTO) at the top of the screen.
For manual tuning, put arrow inside box to adjust tuning.
Tune AUTO
TUNE box
2.
Push the left button or spin the scrollwheel to display TUNE AUTO or TUNE MAN as appropriate.
3.
2.2.2
Automatic tuning is initialized during the installation. However, if you feel that automatic tuning is not working
properly try re-initializing it as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2.3
[Echo]
Go Back
2nd Echo Rej
PM
SART
Tune Initialize
Automatic tuning
Select automatic tuning following section 2.2.1 How to select the tuning method. The TUNE box shows TUNE
AUTO.
2.2.4
Manual tuning
1. Use the trackball to select the RANGE box at top left corner then push the left or right button as appropriate to
select the 48-mile range. Push the left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range.
2. Select manual tuning following the procedure in section 2.2.1 How to select the tuning method.
3. Use the trackball to place the arrow in the tuning bar area in the TUNE box.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust tuning. The best tuning point is where the bar swings maximum. The triangle
below the bar graph shows tuning control position; not the tuning condition.
2-3
2. Radar Operation
2.3
With connection of a gyrocompass, ship's heading is displayed at the right side of the screen. If the GYRO readout
looks wrong or the gyro alarm sounds, follow the procedure below to set heading. For more information, see
Chapter 1. Note that the FURUNO SC-60/120 does not require adjustment on the radar.
1.
Use the trackball to place the arrow in the HDG value at the top right corner of the screen.
2.
Push the right button to open the SENSORS dialog box. Use the arrow buttons to select the SPD/CRS dialog
box.
Roll the trackball downward to select Gyro 1or Rate gyro as applicable then push the scrollwheel to place check
mark in box.
Initial setting of gyro1 is not necessary if it outputs serial data. However, if it is of synchro or stepper type, you
will need to set initial gyro value. For how to adjust the gyro value, see the installation manual.
4.
Click the Close window button (X) to close the SENSORS dialog box.
2-4
2. Radar Operation
2.4
Presentation Modes
2.4.1
Presentation modes
This radar has the following presentation modes in the radar mode:
Relative Motion (RM)
Head-up: Unstabilized
Head-up TB: Head-up with compass-stabilized bearing scale (True Bearing) where the bearing scale rotates with
the compass reading.
Course-up: Compass-stabilized relative to ships orientation at the time of selecting course-up.
North-up: Compass-stabilized with reference to North.
True Motion (TM)
North-up: Ground or sea stabilized with compass and speed inputs.
Use the trackball to select the PRESENTATION MODE box at the top left corner of the screen.
2.
2.4.2
Head-up mode
The head-up mode is a display in which the line connecting own ship and the top of the display indicates own ships
heading.
The target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ships heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker, which indicates heading sensor north. A failure of the
heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the message "No heading available" or "Gyro
error" (message in red) appears at the lower right corner of the screen.
North Marker
Heading Line
Head-up mode
2-5
2. Radar Operation
Course-up mode
The course-up mode is an azimuth stabilized display in which a line connecting the center with the top of the display
indicates own ships intended course (namely, own ships previous heading just before this mode has been selected).
Target pips are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to the intended course, which is
maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line moves in accordance with ships yawing and course change.
This mode is useful for avoiding smearing of picture during course change.
Course-up mode
North-up mode
The north-up mode paints target pips at their measured distances and in their true (heading sensor) directions from
own ship, north bearing maintained at the top of the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to the
ships heading. Requires heading signal.
If the compass fails, the presentation mode changes to head-up and the north marker disappears. A failure of the
heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the message "No heading available" or "Gyro
error" (message in red) appears at the lower right corner of the screen.
North Marker
Heading Line
North-up mode
2-6
2. Radar Operation
A failure of the heading sensor input will cause the heading readout to disappear, and the message "No heading
available" or "Gyro error" (message in red) appears at the lower right corner of the screen.
When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 75% of the radius of the display, own ship position is automatically
reset to a point of 75% radius opposite to the extension of the heading line passing through the display center. You
can also reset the own ship symbol manually by pushing the CU/TM RESET key, or use the trackball to select the
TM Res box at the bottom right corner of the display then push the left button.
Heading
line
North
marker
2-7
2. Radar Operation
2.5
The Target Tracking (TT) and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input and compass
signal. The speed can be entered from a log (STW) or GPS (SOG), or manually from the menu. Note that FURUNO
GPS Navigator GP-90 provides COG and SOG.
For more information about positioning and Kalman filter operation, see Chapter 15 Navigation Sensors.
2.5.1
The system speed that is used for TT, AIS and trails appears at the upper right corner in fields "SPD" and "SB."
These values are used for:
- Calculation of target CPA/TCPA
- Target past position
- Target trail
Note 1: SPD: Longitudinal speed, SB: Transversal speed, positive value to starboard
Note 2: When the AIS feature is active, MANUAL and REF are not available for selection.
To select system speed "SPD" and "SB", do the following:
1.
Put the cursor on the SPD or SB field in the information area then push the left button to show the following
dialog box.
2. Put cursor on Speed source (LOG(BT) in this case) and use scrollwheel to select appropriate source.
2-8
2. Radar Operation
2.5.2
The system speed that is in use for navigation appears at "COG" and "SOG." These values are used for:
TTG calculation
Route Monitoring for ETA calculation
Kalman filter for position calculation
Dead reckoning for position calculation
Note 1: Availability of sensors for selection from the SENSORS dialog box depends on the devices interfaced with
this system.
Note 2: When the AIS feature is active, MANUAL and REF are not available for selection.
The operator can select the navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the SENSORS
dialog box. For more information about source of speed used by system, see Chapter 15
1. Put the cursor on the COG or SOG field in the information area then push the right button.
SPD/CRS POSN
SPD/CRS POSN
NM
kn
DR
kn
kn
kn
kn
kn
DGPS-1st
Ref tgt
kn
kn
kn
LORAN Off
(CALC)
kn
2. Select desired navigation sensors. Use the trackball to select Position sensors (GPS(s) either Primary or
Secondary then push the scrollwheel.
3. Open the SPD/CRS page, select the appropriate log then push the left button. Select among LOG or Dual log
(water): Log, speed thru water (STW) Dual log (bottom), speed over ground (SOG). Note that a log cannot
produce BT (Bottom Tracking) speed in deep waters without set and drift entry.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to close the SENSORS dialog box.
2-9
2. Radar Operation
2.5.3
If no automatic speed input is selected or working, enter speed manually as below. In this case the speed data type is
shown as (man).
Manual speed can be set on the SPD/CRS page of SENSORS dialog box.
1. Put the cursor on the Position field in the information area.
2. Push the right button to open the SPD/CRS page.
SPD/CRS POSN
kn
kn
kn
kn
kn
Ref tgt
kn
(CALC)
3. Use the trackball to select Manual speed, and spin the scrollwheel to enter desired speed.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to close the SENSORS dialog box.
Note: The maximum manual speed value that can be entered is set with MAX Speed in the Ship parameters window
in the Ship and Route Parameters dialog box. For details, see section 19.1.3 Navigation parameters setting.
2-10
2. Radar Operation
2.6
The selected range scale, range ring interval and pulse length are shown at the upper left corner on the screen. When
a target of interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it appears in 50-90% of the display radius.
By trackball
1.
Use the trackball to select the RANGE box at the top left corner of the screen. The guidance area shows
"RANGE - / OK / RANGE +".
2. Push the left button to lower the range; the right button to raise the range. You can also select the range by
spinning the scrollwheel then pushing it.
2.7
The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver. The proper setting is such that the background noise is just
visible on the screen. If you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand excessive
sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor contrast between
desired echoes and the background noise on the display.
Adjust the gain so background noise is just visible on the screen.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the gain level indicator at the top of the screen.
Gain level
Put arrow inside box
to adjust gain.
Gain
67
2. Spin the scrollwheel downward to increase the gain or upward to decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are available.
2.8
Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known as sea clutter. The higher the
waves, and the higher the antenna above the water, the further the clutter will extend. When sea clutter masks the
picture, suppress it with the A/C SEA control, either manually or automatically.
When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is decreased more than when only one is adjusted.
For that reason adjust them carefully.
The echo average is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to
detect than stationary ones when the echo average is active.
2-11
2. Radar Operation
2.8.1
Auto A/C SEA allows for fine-tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within 20 dB. Accordingly, with the bar reading set
to 100, gain is not lowered to minimum as with manual A/C SEA on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA
level is low because the average value of the original input echo is low in areas where there are no sea surface
reflections. For example, when the ship is alongside a quay and the radar picture shows echoes from both land and
sea, you can observe the size of echoes because the STC curve is different depending size of echoes.
Note: The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes. Adjust the control carefully, watching the display.
1.
Use the trackball to select SEA MAN (whichever is shown) at the top of the display.
2.
61
By trackball
1.
Use the trackball to place the arrow in the A/C SEA level indicator at the top of the display.
2.
While observing the radar image, spin the scrollwheel downward to increase the A/C SEA or upward to
decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are available.
2.8.2
Use the trackball to place the arrow in the Sea AUTO box.
2.
3.
Watching the radar image, adjust the A/C SEA with the A/C SEA control. 100 levels (0-100) are available.
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow in the Sea AUTO box.
2. Push the left button to show Sea MAN.
3. Put the cursor on the A/C SEA level indicator.
4. While observing the radar image, spin the scrollwheel downward to increase the A/C SEA or upward to
decrease it. 100 levels (0-100) are available.
2-12
2. Radar Operation
2.9
Use the AUTO RAIN and A/C RAIN to suppress rain clutter. AUTO RAIN suppresses rain clutter in the picture and
A/C RAIN suppresses clutter picked up by the antenna.
When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced the sensitivity is decreased more than when only one is adjusted.
For that reason adjust them carefully.
The echo average is useful for reducing reflections from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to
detect than stationary ones when the echo average is active.
Be careful not to remove all rain clutter, because you can erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak
echoes is greater when you use both A/C RAIN and A/C SEA to reduce clutter.
2.9.1
1.
Use the trackball to select the AUTO RAIN indication at the left side of the screen.
2.
Push the left button to select the auto rain level desired. The indication changes in the sequence of OFF, 1, 2, 3
and 4. The higher the value the greater the suppression.
AUTO RAIN
2.9.2
By trackball
1. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the A/C RAIN level indicator at the top right side of the display.
A/C RAIN level
Put arrow inside box
to adjust A/C RAIN.
Rain MAN
63
2-13
2. Radar Operation
Note: The detection range is reduced when the A/C RAIN is used to show targets in rain. Generally, the amount of
rain, TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in determining how the detection range is affected. The figures
shown below illustrate this occurrence.
4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
16
16 mm/h rain - short pulse
4 mm/h rain - short pulse
16 mm/h rain - long pulse
4 mm/h rain - long pulse
14
12
10
4
2
0
0
4
6
8
10
Original Range of First Detection (NM)
12
14
16
14
12
10
2
0
0
4
6
8
10
Original Range of First Detection (NM)
12
14
16
2-14
2. Radar Operation
2.10
Interference Rejector
Use the trackball to select the IR indication at the left side of the
screen.
2.
2.11
Interference
rejector
The range to a target may be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings, with the cursor, or with the VRM.
Use the fixed range rings to obtain a rough estimate of the range to a target. They are the concentric solid circles
about own ship, or the sweep origin. The number of rings is automatically determined by the selected range scale
and their interval is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen. Count the number of rings between the center
of the display and the target. Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of
the nearest ring.
2.11.1
1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to display the Main menu.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select Mark then push the scrollwheel.
4. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the setting of Range Rings.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to select OFF or ON as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
6. Click the Close window button (X) to close the Mark menu.
2-15
2. Radar Operation
2.11.2
There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2. They are dashed rings so that you can discriminate them from the fixed
range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from each other by different lengths of dashes.
Push the VRM ON key to display either of the VRMs. Successively pushing the VRM ON key toggles the
active VRM between No. 1 and No. 2. The currently active marker is enclosed with >.....<.
2.
Operate the VRM rotary control to align the active variable range marker with the inner edge of the target of
interest and read its distance at the lower-right corner of the screen. Each VRM remains at the same
geographical distance when you operate the RANGE key or the RANGE box. This means that the apparent
radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale.
3.
By trackball
1.
Use the trackball to place the arrow in the VRM1 or VRM2 box, whichever VRM you want to use.
VRM boxes
2.
The guidance area reads "VRM on/." Push the left button to turn on the VRM. The guidance area now reads "/L
= DELETE /."
3.
Put the cursor on the VRM1 or VRM2 box, and spin the scrollwheel to align the marker with the inner edge of
the target. Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the RANGE key. This
means that the apparent radius of the VRM ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale.
4.
To erase a VRM, select the appropriate VRM box then push the left button until the VRM disappears from the
screen.
2-16
00:00
VRM1
>3.682NM<
2. Radar Operation
2.12
Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) to take bearings of targets. There are two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each
EBL is a straight dashed line extending out from the own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture.
The coarse dashed line is the No. 1 EBL and the fine dashed one is the No. 2 EBL.
2.12.1
By trackball
1.
Use the trackball to place the arrow in the EBL1 or EBL2 box,
whichever EBL you want to use.
EBL boxes
2.
3.
To erase an EBL, select the appropriate EBL box then push the left button until the EBL disappears from the
screen.
2.12.2
The EBL readout is affixed by "R" (relative) if it is relative to own ship's heading, "T" (true) if it is referenced to the
north.
To select bearing reference in the head-up mode, do the following:
1.
Use the trackball to select the Menu box at the right side of the screen.
2.
3.
4.
Use the trackball to put the arrow on the setting of the EBL cursor bearing.
5.
Spin the scrollwheel to select True or REL then push the scrollwheel.
6.
Click the Close window button (X) to close the Mark menu.
Note: When the gyrocompass heading changes, the EBL and its indication change as follows:
Head-up, relative: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Head-up, true: EBL indication remains the same; EBL moves.
Course-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
Course-up, relative: EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves.
North-up, relative: EBL indication remains the same, EBL moves.
North-up, true: EBL indication and EBL remain unchanged.
2-17
2. Radar Operation
2.13
Pulse Length
The pulse length in use is displayed at the upper-left position of the screen using the indications shown in the table
below.
Label and pulse length
Indication
S1 (Short pulse 1)
S2 (Short pulse 2)
M1 (Medium pulse 1)
M2 (Medium pulse 2)
M3 (Medium pulse 3)
L (Long pulse)
Appropriate pulse lengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. If you are not satisfied with the
current pulse length settings, you can change them as shown below.
2.13.1
You can select the pulse length for the 0.5 to 24 nm range scales as below.
1. Use the trackball to select the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.
3. From the Pulse window, select the option of the range for which you want to adjust pulse length. Spin the
scrollwheel to choose setting then push the scrollwheel.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to finish.
2.13.2
1. Use the trackball to select the PULSE box at the left side of the screen.
PULSE XX
2. Push the left button to shorten the pulse length or the right button to widen the pulse length. You can also select
the pulse length by spinning it pushing it to confirm selection.
2-18
2. Radar Operation
2.14
The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere with the trackball to enable measurement of range and bearing
between any targets. This function is also useful for assessment of the potential risk of collision. It is possible to read
CPA (Closest Point of Approach) by using a VRM as shown below in Figure (a). If the EBL passes through the
sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in Figure (b), the target ship is on a collision course.
2.14.1
Press the EBL ON key to display or activate an EBL (No. 1 or No. 2).
2.
Put the cursor (+) on a target appearing as threatening (A in the figure below) by operating the trackball.
3.
4.
After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL bisects the
target at the new position (A'). The EBL readout shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative
depending on the EBL bearing reference setting.
Note: If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using a VRM as shown in left-hand figure
below. If the EBL passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right-hand figure below, the
target ship is on a collision course.
5.
To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, push the EBL OFFSET key.
By trackball
1.
2.
With the cursor inside the effective display area, spin the scrollwheel to show "Nav Marks" in the guidance area
then push the right button.
3.
Use the trackball to place the offset EBL on a target appearing as threatening (A in the figure below), spin the
scrollwheel to show Offcenter REF pt then push the right button to anchor the EBL origin.
4.
After waiting a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL used in step 1 until it bisects the target at the
new position (A'). The EBL readout shows the target ship's course, which may be true or relative depending on
the EBL bearing reference setting.
To deactivate the offset EBL and restore normal EBL operation, spin the scrollwheel to show the Nav Marks menu
and check "Centered REF Pt".
2-19
2. Radar Operation
2.14.2
The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed), north stabilized (true) or
referenced to own ships heading (relative).
1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to display the Main menu.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select Mark then push the scrollwheel.
4. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the setting of EBL Offset: STAB.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to select GND, N or HDG as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
6. Click the Close window button (X) to close the Mark menu.
2-20
2. Radar Operation
2.15
Operate the trackball to place the origin of the No. 1 EBL, for example, on a target of interest (target 1 in the
illustrated example).
2.
3.
Operate the EBL rotary control until the EBL passes through another target of interest (target 2).
4.
Operate the VRM rotary control until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside edge of target 2. The active
VRM readout at the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.
Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T". To return the EBL origin
to the screen center, push the EBL OFFSET key again.
By trackball
1.
2.
Push the ENTER MARK key to open the Nav Marks dialog box.
3.
Use the trackball to put the cursor on target 1, use the scrollwheel to show Offcenter REF pt in the guidance box
then push the scrollwheel.
4.
Put the cursor in the EBL box, spin the scrollwheel, and put the cursor on target 2.
5.
Operate the No. 1 VRM until the range marker on the EBL aligns with target 2. The active VRM readout at the
lower-right corner of the screen indicates the distance between the two targets.
You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2 VRM.
2-21
2. Radar Operation
2.16
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without switching to a larger range
scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the
cursor is set beyond 75% of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit.
This feature is not available on ranges higher than 72 nm.
Note 1: If the position of the CCRP results in a part of the bearing scale not being distinguishable, that part of the
bearing scale is indicated with appropriate reduced detail.
Note 2: When the reference point is set for "conning position (CCRP) and the position of the antenna is more than
75% of the effective radius, offcenter is not cancelled on short ranges.
To off-center the radar picture, do the following:
2.
Push the OFF CENTER key. The sweep origin is offcentered to the cursor position.
3.
By trackball
1.
With the cursor inside the effective display area, spin the
scrollwheel to display "TM Reset/Info/Ship Offcenter" in the
guidance area.
2.
Use the trackball to put the cursor where you want to locate
the screen center.
3.
4.
To cancel the off-center function, show "TM Reset/Info/Ship Offcenter" in the guidance area then push the right
button.
2.17
Echo Stretch
The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make them easier to see, and it is
available on any range. There are three types of echo stretch, 1, 2 and 3, and the higher the number the greater the
amount of stretching.
The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns (clutter) from sea surface, rain and radar
interference. For this reason, make sure these types of interference have been sufficiently suppressed before
activating the echo stretch.
1. Use the trackball to select the ES indication at the left side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to select the echo stretch level desired. The indication changes in the sequence of OFF, 1, 2,
and 3.
2-22
2. Radar Operation
2.18
Echo Averaging
The echo average feature effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships appear
on the screen at almost the same position every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as
sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over successive picture frames. If an echo is
solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in
reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.
Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true motion over the ground of each
target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys will be shown while suppressing random echoes such as sea
clutter. True echo average is not however effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the
ground.
Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than stationary ones.
Note 2: Do not use the echo averaging function under heavy pitching and rolling; loss of targets can result.
Note 3: Echo averaging can be used without a heading sensor. For further details, contact your dealer.
Note 4: Echo averaging requires heading, position and speed data.
Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA control. Leave a little sea clutter on
the screen so as not to erase weak targets. Then, do as follows:
Select EAV at the left side of the screen, then push the left button to choose setting.
OFF: Echo averaging OFF
1, 2:
Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. "2" is more effective than "1" in detecting targets hidden in strong sea
clutter. However, "1" is more effective than "2" in displaying high speed targets. Select the setting best suited
to current conditions. For effective monitoring of high-speed craft, you should use "2" together with Wiper.
3:
Stably displays unstable targets; distinguish high-speed craft from sea clutter.
Echo average
2-23
2. Radar Operation
2.19
Target Trails
The trails of the radar echoes of targets may be displayed in the form of synthetic afterglow. Target trails are
selected either relative or true and may be sea or ground stabilized. True motion trails require a compass signal, and
position and speed inputs.
2.19.1
2.19.2
Trail time
Available setting
Scrollwheel
The timer above the TRAIL MODE box counts up the trail time and is erased once the terminal count is reached.
For example, if the trail time is six minutes, the timer is erased when trails have been plotted six minutes. The
maximum time for continuous plotting is 99:59. When the timer counts to 99:59, the timer is reset to zero, all target
trails are erased then trails are restarted.
2.19.3
You can clear all target trails to restart the trail process. Target trails are cleared and the trailing process restarts
from time count zero at the current target trail plot interval.
1. Use the trackball to place the arrow on the TRAIL TIME box at the bottom right corner of the screen. The
guidance area reads "Trail SEL/L=Delete / OK /.
2. Long-push the left button or the CANCEL TRAILS key to reset target trails.
2.19.4
2-24
2. Radar Operation
2.20
PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when
navigating. Up to six sets of PI lines are available depending on the maximum number of PI lines selected on the
menu.
You can control the orientation and interval of the PI lines from the PI line box, which is at the lower left corner.
PI
lines
PI lines
PI 1
ON
2-25
2. Radar Operation
PI line mode
PI lines orientation may be selected from parallel or perpendicular. This function is available when Number of Lines
in the Parallel Index Line window is set for other than "1".
1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen.
2. Push the left button to display the Main menu.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select Mark then push the scrollwheel.
4. Use the trackball to select the setting of Orientation.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to select Perpendicular or Parallel as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
6. Click the Close window button (X) on the menu to close the menu.
2-26
2. Radar Operation
2.21
Markers
Stern marker
The stern marker, which is a dot-and-dash line, appears opposite to the heading line. To
display or erase this marker, do the following:
1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the display then push
the left button to display the Main menu.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select Mark then push the scrollwheel.
3. Use the trackball to select the setting of Stern Mark.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select Off or On as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
5. Click the Close window button (X) on the menu to close the menu.
North marker
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up mode, the north marker
moves around the bearing scale in accordance with the compass signal.
Heading line
X
Heading line
Beam line
Beam line
Scaled symbol
Minimized symbol
1. Use the trackball to select the Symbol DISP box at the right side of the display then push the left button.
2. Select the General page.
3. Use the trackball to select the setting of Ship outlines.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select Off or On as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
5.
6.
Spin the scrollwheel to select Beam width or Length as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
2-27
2. Radar Operation
2.22
Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the radar, which can be a nuisance in a
busy situation. Instead of changing radar settings case by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide
optimum settings for often-encountered situations.
The radar's internal computer offers several picture setup options to be assigned to each function key for your
specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the functions is assigned to detect ships and labeled SHIP on
the PICTURE box. By choosing SHIP, the radar will be instantly set for optimum detection of ships.
Four user-programmable setups are also provided (labeled PICTURE1-PICTURE4), so that you can have the radar
automatically adjusted to those conditions that are not covered by the provided setup options.
Below are the preset picture setup options provided with this radar.
Picture setup options description
Label
Description
Label
Description
NEAR
FAR
NEAR BUOY
FAR BUOY
ROUGH SEA
SHIP
HARBOR
COAST
Each picture setup option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving optimum setup for a
particular navigating situation. These include interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise rejector,
automatic anti-sea and anti-rain clutters, video contrast, pulse length and sea and radar conditions.
Adjusting these features from the PICTURE menu changes the original function key settings. To restore the original
settings for a particular picture setup option, it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we
recommended that you use the user-programmable function sets when frequent adjustment of the radar image is
necessary.
2-28
2. Radar Operation
PICTURE1
NEAR
PICTURE2
PICTURE3
FAR
NEAR BUOY
PICTURE4
FAR BUOY
2-29
2. Radar Operation
ROUGH SEA
SHIP
HARBOR
COAST
2.22.1
Use the trackball to select the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
2.22.2
Four user-programmable picture setups are provided and they are labeled PICTURE 1 PICTURE 4 in the
PICTURE box. You can program them as below.
1.
Use the trackball to select the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
2.
Push the left button to select PICTURE 1, PICTURE 2, PICTURE 3 or PICTURE 4, whichever you wish to set.
2-30
2. Radar Operation
3.
PICTURE menu
4.
5. Use the trackball to select Video Contrast then push the scrollwheel.
6. Spin the scrollwheel to select 1, 2, 3 or 4 (Dynamic Range) or A, B, C (Curve) as appropriate then push the
scrollwheel. Refer to the description and illustration below.
1-4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the narrowest dynamic range.
A: Mid-level in the curve is low, so this setting is suitable for suppressing rain clutter.
B: Curve between A and C.
C: Mid-level in the curve is high, so this setting is suitable for detecting distant targets.
CONTRAST
C
B
A
CONTRAST
4
1
2-31
2. Radar Operation
2.22.3
If you get lost in operation while adjusting the settings for a picture setup, you can easily restore user settings for
that picture setup. Note that user settings are deleted when default settings are restored.
1. Left-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the picture setup option for which you want
to restore its user settings.
2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.
3. Click the User button.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to close the PICTURE menu.
2.22.4
Any of the radar functions programmed with the picture setup options may be adjusted as desired. If you get lost in
operation and want to restore the default settings for a particular picture setup operation, do the following:
1. Left-click the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen to select the picture setup option for which you want
to restore its user settings.
2. Push the right button to show the PICTURE menu.
3. Click the Factory button.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to close the PICTURE menu..
2.23
Noise Rejector
White noise may show itself on the screen as random "speckles" spread over the entire radar image. You can remove
this noise as follows:
1.
Use the trackball to select the PICTURE box at the left side of the screen.
2.
PICTURE menu
3.
4.
Spin the scrollwheel to select On or Off as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
5.
Click the Close window button (X) to close the PICTURE menu.
2-32
2. Radar Operation
2.24
In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes (second-trace echoes) on the
screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been
transmitted.
Tx repetition
Second-trace
echo
False echo
range
Actual range
Second-trace echo
To reject second-trace echoes:
1.
Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel to select Echo then push the scrollwheel to open the Echo menu.
3.
Spin the scrollwheel to select 2nd Echo Rej then push the scrollwheel.
[Echo]
Go Back
2nd Echo Rej
PM
SART
Tune Initialize
4.
Spin the scrollwheel to check (activate) or uncheck (deactivate) 2nd Echo Rej as appropriate then push the
scrollwheel.
5.
2-33
2. Radar Operation
2.25
You can adjust relative brilliance levels of various markers and alphanumeric readouts displayed on the screen.
Adjustment can be done Brilliance 1 - Brilliance 4 independently.
1.
Use the trackball to select the BRILL box at the bottom left corner of the screen.
2.
3.
Use the trackball to select the level indicator of the item you wish to adjust then push the scrollwheel.
4.
5.
Click the Close window button (X) to close the PICTURE menu.
2-34
2. Radar Operation
2.26
Watch Alarm
The watch alarm function sounds the buzzer at set intervals to alert the operator to view the radar picture. When the
watch alarm is active, the WATCH box appears at the bottom left of the screen. The timer in the box is displayed
until the buzzer sounds.
The WATCH box appears" at the right side of the screen with a watch alarm timer that counts down from value set
(for example, "12:00").
Watch
12:00
Watch box
When a preset time interval has elapsed, the audio watch alarm sounds, the screen label WATCH turns red and the
watch alarm timer freezes at "0:00." To silence the alarm, push the ALARM ACK key on the full keyboard or use
the trackball to select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button. The normal color for the WATCH label is
restored and the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial value and starts the count-down sequence again.
If you push the ALARM ACK key or click the box with the left button before the selected time interval is reached,
the watch alarm timer is reset to the initial value and the count-down sequence is restarted.
To set watch time interval:
1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select Alarms then push the scrollwheel.
3. Use the trackball to select the value of Watch Alarm. Spin the scrollwheel to select appropriate time interval
then push the scrollwheel.
4. Close the Alarms menu by clicking the Close window button (X) at the upper right corner of the menu.
2-35
2. Radar Operation
2.27
Interswitch
The interswitch of this radar uses an Ethernet to transfer video and control signals. A digital signal transfers the
video and control signals. You can connect four antennas and eight display units. Set radar display and antenna
groups from the ANTENNA SELECT display.
When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment (set at installation) for that antenna
is automatically applied.
The ANTENNA box at the upper left position shows current antenna selection.
Note: When network error is found, the message "Connection lost to Radar CPU" or "LAN Radar conn error"
appears. To restore normal operation, reset the power of all equipment connected to the network. Recheck the
network (LAN cable, HUB, etc.), reset the power of the radar, and re-enter Interswitch settings.
2.27.1
2-36
2. Radar Operation
2.27.2
You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display in the radar system. As an
example, the procedure below shows how to select the no. 1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit.
1. Right-click the ANTENNA box to show the ANT INFO display.
2. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For example, select Disp2 to select the
no. 2 display unit.
3. The cursor is now selecting the current display and antenna combination for the no. 2 display unit. Roll the
scrollwheel to display Ant1(M) then push the left button.
4. Repeat step 3 and 4 to set other display and antenna combinations.
5. Click Store Inter-SW.
6. Push the right button to close the menu.
2.27.3
An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one MASTER display unit for one
antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as masters, the display last-set as master becomes the master and all
other displays are automatically changed to slave.
Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly depending on selection as Master or
Slave.
An antenna unit without a MASTER display cannot be selected on the sub display units. If there is no antenna
unit set as master, the lowest number display is automatically set as master.
2-37
2. Radar Operation
RADAR
FUNCTIONS
AIS function
Brilliance
Echo stretch
Echo averaging
Echo trails
EBL
Lat/long data
Presentation mode
Speed data
TT, AIS on/off
TT, AIS track interval
Vector mode
Vector time
VRM
Range
(Sampling at Master)
CONTROL
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Independent
Dependent control
MASTER DISPLAY
OPTION
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
(Echo sampling at master range)
SLAVE DISPLAY
OPTION
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
Desired value can be set
A/C SEA
A/C RAIN
Auto Rain
Gain
IR
Picture setting
STBY/TX
Tuning
Reference point
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Dependent control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
Cannot control
TT LOST alarm
TT COLLISION alarm
TT alarm ACK
TT acquire
TT/AIS AZ
Common control
Common control
Common control
Common control
Common control
If the message "CONNECTION LOST TO RADAR CPU" or "LAN RADAR CONN ERROR" appears, do one
of the following as applicable:
- If only your antenna is not displayed on the ANTENNA SELECT display, LAN line in your processor may be
faulty. In this case, use the standalone mode.
- If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the ANTENNA SELECT
display, LAN line in other processor unit may be faulty. In this case, see section 2.27.2 for how to select
a different antenna unit.
When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone operation is possible.
2.27.4
For the ship that carries multiple antennas, you can choose the antenna to use as follows:
1. Roll the trackball to place the arrow in the ANTENNA box at the left side of the screen.
Ant1(M) X-BAND
2. Roll the scrollwheel to choose an antenna then push the left button.
2-38
2. Radar Operation
2.28
Performance Monitor
A performance monitor, incorporated in the antenna unit, is required for a radar installed on vessels of 300 GT and
upward engaged in international voyages. Two units are available:
X-band radar PM-31 (9410 45 MHz)
S-band radar PM-51 (3050 30 MHz)
[Echo]
Go Back
2nd Echo Rej
PM
SART
Tune Initialize
Echo menu
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select PM then push the scrollwheel. Check to activate, uncheck to deactivate.
"PM" appears on the display when the performance monitor is active.
Display
State
Tx: Normal
Rx: Normal
13.5 to
18.5 nm
13.5 to
18.5 nm
Tx, Rx:
No arc appears when
attenuation is 10dB.
Replace magnetron.
2-39
2. Radar Operation
2.29
This radar provides three sets of color and brilliance sets (palette) to match any ambient lighting condition. The
default specifications of each brilliance set is as shown in the table below.
FCR-21x7
FCR-28x7
Panel
Dimmer
Day
45
65
12
White
Gray/Black
Day-Blue
45
65
12
White
Blue/Black
Dusk
25
55
12
White
Gray/Black
Dusk-Blue
25
55
12
White
Blue/Black
Night
24
12
White
Gray/Black
Palette
Display Brilliance
Others
Text
Color
Background/
Circle
Note: The above default settings are restored whenever the setting for Calibrated is ON.
Use the trackball to select the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel to select color and brilliance set from among BRILL1 BRILL4.
3.
Use the trackball to select the BRILL box at the left side of the screen.
BRILLIANCE menu
3. Set the cursor on the level indicator of the item you wish to adjust and spin the scrollwheel to adjust.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to close the BRILLIANCE menu.
2-40
2. Radar Operation
2.30
Reference Position
The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (heading line, stern mark, etc.) can be
antenna position or consistent common reference point (CCRP), which is a location on own ship to which all
horizontal measurements, for example range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of approach
(CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA), are normally referenced.
To select reference position, left-click the REF POINT indication at the top of the screen to select ANT or CCRP as
applicable.
The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as shown below. If the CCRP is
positioned outside of the effective display area, the bearing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail.
Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference position as in the table below.
Markers, measurements and reference point
Category
Range and bearing
measurement
Graphics
Item
EBL
VRM
Cursor
PI line
Range ring
Drop mark
Heading line
Stern mark
Beam line
Own ship vector
Own ship track
Bearing cursor
Course, speed
CPA, TCPA
BCR, BCT
Own ship data
Reference point
CCRP
Antenna position
Range and bearing
Range and bearing
measured from CCRP measured from antenna
position
Heading
Speed
Course over ground
Speed over ground
Own L/L
2-41
2. Radar Operation
2.31
Cursor position data is shown at the top right side of the radar display.
3440.849'N
+ 13518.303'E
TTG
01:14
48.6T
25.62 NM
Cursor position in
latitude and longitude
Bearing and range
to cursor position
Time-to-go to
cursor position
To show Time-to-go data:
1. Open the main menu followed by the Initial Settings menu.
2. Put the cursor on the triangle in the menu to show the Operation menu.
3. Put the cursor on TTG Display.
4. Select Off, Ground Speed, or Water Speed.
2.32
Drop Mark
The operator inscribes a drop mark ( ) at a selected location to find the range and bearing from own ship to the
mark. This can be useful for marking a point to avoid while navigating to a destination.
2-42
2. Radar Operation
2.33
Anchor Watch
Anchor watch is used to monitor how vessel is staying at anchor. You are able to set limit for movement of vessel at
anchor (Drag circle). If your vessel travels more than the distance set here, the alert "874: Anchor watch" appears.
Alarm
setting
: Alarm triggered
2. Enter desired range value (0.01-9.99(nm)) for the anchor watch in the Range field.
3. Drop the anchor then click the Drop Anchor button. The Start Anchor Watch button appears below the Drop
Anchor button.
4. Click the Start Anchor Watch button to start the anchor watch.
2-43
2. Radar Operation
2.34
2.34.1
The Chart DISP box, which appears at the lower right-hand corner on the screen, functions to set chart display
related settings. The box is always shown in the chart radar mode. You can show it in the ECDIS mode by selecting
Chart Display from the menu. For details, see section 7.9.3 How to control visible chart features (chart display).
2.34.2
You can select what objects to display on the chart radar screen. There are four different pre-defined settings
available. Indication of selected setting appears on the chart radar screen.
2-44
2. Radar Operation
Open the Chart Display dialog box and put the cursor on the black triangle on
Chart Display dialog box then push the left mouse button.
2.
Choose Set IMO Base, Set IMO Primary, Set IMO Standard or Set IMO All
Other from the menu.
2-45
2. Radar Operation
2.34.3
The chart radar mode displays both the radar echo and chart symbols, with the radar echo having priority. If the
chart symbols become hidden in the radar picture, do one of the following to give temporary priority to the chart
symbols.
Chart priority
In the chart radar mode, select the Chart Priority box (bottom left-hand corner) and push and hold down the left
mouse button to give priority to the chart symbols (coastline, depth contours, navigation buoys, etc.). Release the
button to restore priority to the radar echo.
2.34.4
If, in the ECDIS mode, there is something wrong with a chart, a "permanent message for S57 charts" appears. For
details see section 7.1.3 Permanent messages for S57 charts.
For the chart radar mode, a "permanent message" cannot be displayed automatically. In this mode, when something
is wrong with a chart, the Chart Status box appears. Click the box to show the permanent message in the data
display area.
2.34.5
The chart alert function operates in both the chart radar mode and the ECDIS mode. There are two types of chart
alerts: your ship's predicted course, and route alert. For details see Chapter 9 Chart Alerts.
For the ship's predicted course alert, the operator sets a safety contour (see section 9.1.1 How to select safety
contour) to select safety depth suitable for the ship. The operator also sets the parameters for own ship predicted
movement (see section 9.3 How to Activate Own Ship Check).
For the route alert, route planning (see section 9.4 Route Planning) and route monitoring (see section 9.5 Route
Monitoring) functions are available.
Note that if you change from "chart radar" mode or "ECDIS" to "radar" mode, the chart alert feature is automatically
switched off by the system.
2-46
3. Radar Observation
3.1
General
3.1.1
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an
echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the point representing the antenna position.
It is mainly dependent on the pulse length, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang reduction and
digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a shorter range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity
of picture. The IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m, respectively. This
series of radars satisfy this requirement.
Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on several factors such as the
height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the
target, and the atmospheric conditions.
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar horizon or a little shorter. The radar
horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax
is given in the following equation.
where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)
h1:antenna height (m)
h2 : target height (m)
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the height of the target is 16 meters, the
maximum radar range is;
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs the radar signal).
Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution and range resolution.
Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets that are
at the same range and close together. It is proportional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the
wavelength. The length of the antenna radiator should be selected for a bearing resolution better than 2.5 (IMO
Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band
radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet (3.6 m) or longer.
3-1
3. Radar Observation
Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from two targets that are on the same
bearing and close to each other. This is determined by pulse length only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers
the discrimination better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars.
Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors having an echoing area of 10 m2.
Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a target can be measured. The
accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is
usually taken relative to the ships heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an
important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, put the
target echo at the extreme position on the screen by selecting a suitable range.
Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the radar. Generally, there are two means
of measuring range: the fixed range rings and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the
screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range to a target. The variable range
markers diameter is increased or decreased so that the marker touches the inner edge of the target, allowing the
operator to obtain more accurate range measurements.
3-2
3. Radar Observation
3.2
False Echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disappear even if there are
targets. They are, however, recognized if you understand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are
shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from
a solid object like a large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A
second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the
display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range
of the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can
be reduced and often removed by decreasing the gain
(sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C SEA control.
True
echo
Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation
escapes on each side of the beam, called sidelobes. If a target
exists where it can be detected by the side lobes as well as the
main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides
of the true echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually
only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be
reduced through careful reduction of the gain or proper
adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
True echo
Main-lobe
Side-lobe
Spurious
target
Antenna
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented
at two positions on the screen. One of them is the true echo
directly reflected by the target and the other is a false echo
that is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close
to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes
close to a large metal bridge, for example.
Target ship
Own ship
True
echo
False
echo
Mirror image
of target ship
Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna
block the radar beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is
more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sector may be
produced. Within this sector targets can not be detected.
Radar
antenna
Radar
mast
Shadow sector
3-3
3. Radar Observation
3.3
3.3.1
SART description
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of
approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a response that is swept repetitively across the
complete radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 s) through the band before
beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 s) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated
for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the
interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency
match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally
spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my show also the 12 responses generated
during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be
interspersed with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Screen B: When SART
is close
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo from SART
Radar antenna
beamwidth
24 NM
Echo from
SART
1.5 NM
Position of
SART
Own ship
position
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
Own ship
position
SART mark
length
7.5 s
Sweep time
Radar receiver
bandwidth
95 s
SART
3-4
Position of
SART
3. Radar Observation
3.3.2
This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detection. This feature automatically
detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condition. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the
SART marks are not erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz band. When
the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART marks will enlarge to large arcs, blurring a large part of the
screen.
To set up for SART detection do the following:
1. Use the trackball to select the MENU box then push the left button.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select Echo then push the left button.
[Echo]
Go Back
2nd Echo Rej
PM
SART
Tune Initialize
Echo menu
3. Spin the scrollwheel to select SART then push the scrollwheel. Check to set up for SART, uncheck for normal
operation.
4. With SART turned on, radar functions are automatically set as follows:
Range: 12 nm
Pulse Length: Long
Echo Stretch: Off
Noise Rejector: Off
Echo Averaging: Off
Interference Rejector: Off
Performance Monitor: Off
A/C Rain:Off
"SART" appears when this feature is active. Be sure to turn off the SART feature when SART detection is no longer
your objective.
3.3.3
Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulse length and is usually switched with the range scale and the associated
pulse length. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths
of 10-25 MHz with short pulses on short ranges.
A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it is preferable to use a medium
bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
3-5
3. Radar Observation
3.4
RACON
A RACON is a radar beacon that emits radar-receivable signals in the radar frequency spectrum (X- or S-band).
There are several signal formats. The most common one is a rectangular echo, originating at a point just beyond the
position of the radar beacon. A RACON has a Morse coded pattern. Note that the position on the radar display is not
accurate.
3.5
An RTE is a radar transponder that is mounted on navigation buoys and masts of small crafts to significantly
improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or RACON, which are passive, the RTE receives a radar signal,
amplifies it and re-transmits it, with the intention of making the target's signal look larger on a radar display. The
RTE is available in X-band and S-band types.
3-6
Usage Precautions
4-1
4.2
Controls for TT
Keyboard
The TT uses the keys shown below.
BRILL
OFF
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
ON
EBL
OFF
ON
1
HL
OFF
2
EBL
OFFSET
MODE
F1
F2
4
OFF
CENTER
5
CU/TM
RESET
6
INDEX
LINE
F3
F4
7
VECTOR
TIME
8
VECTOR
MODE
9
TARGET
LIST
VRM
MENU
ACQ
TARGET
DATA
RANGE
STBY
TX
CANCEL
TRAILS
ENTER
BRILL
MARK
ALARM
ACK
TARGET
CANCEL
ACQ:
TARGET DATA:
Trackball
With the cursor inside the effective display area, you can access TT functions by spinning the scrollwheel or
choosing appropriate TT function from the CURSOR menu.
Spin the scrollwheel to show the following indications in the guidance area to access respective TT function:
Tgt Acquire: Manually acquires a target.
Tgt Cancel /L = All: Cancels tracking on cursor-selected TT.
4.3
To show or hide the TT display, use the trackball to select the TT setting at the right side of the display. Push the left
mouse button to show AUTO MAN (activate) or OFF (deactivate) as desired.
AUTO
MAN
4-2
4.4
The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW, BT, SOG, or echo-referenced speed
(based on 3 max. stationary objects). Manual input is also possible.
For automatic or manual input, see section 2.5 How to Input Your Ship's Speed. For echo-referenced speed input
follow the procedure below.
4.4.1
changes to
R1
in three minutes
R1
Reference target
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to continue entering reference marks. Three may be entered.
4-3
4.5
Automatic Acquisition
This radar can acquire a maximum of 100 targets, the number of automatically and manually acquired targets
determined by the TT TGT menu setting.
TT TGT menu setting and target acquisition condition
Menu Setting
MAN100
AUTO25
AUTO50
AUTO75
AUTO100
Acquisition condition
100 targets manually
25 targets automatically, 75 targets manually
50 targets automatically, 50 targets manually
75 targets automatically, 25 targets manually
100 targets automatically
A target just acquired automatically is marked with a broken circle and a vector appears within one minute to
indicate the target's motion trend. Within three minutes, the initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes
ready for stable tracking. At this point, the broken circle changes to a solid circle.
4.5.1
1. Use the trackball to select the TT ACQ mode box at the right side of the screen then push the right button to
show the TT menu.
TT menu
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select automatic acquisition condition desired, referring to the table above for details,
then push the scrollwheel.
Note 1: The TT ACQ mode box shows AUTO, AUTOMAN or MAN depending on the automatic acquisition
condition selected.
Note 2: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets is reached, the message "TT AUTO ACQ
100% full" is displayed at the right-hand side of screen.
Note 3: Targets cannot be acquired manually using acquisition condition "AUTO 100". Also, you cannot acquire
targets automatically in acquisition condition "MAN 100".
4-4
4.5.2
When the TT has acquired the menu-set number of targets automatically, the message "TT AUTO ACQ 100% full"
(or "TT MAN ACQ 100% full") appears at the right side of the screen and no more auto acquisition occurs unless
targets are lost or manually cancelled. Should this happen, cancel tracking of less important targets or perform
manual acquisition.
Use the trackball to put the cursor (+) on the TT or reference target to cancel tracking.
2.
By trackball
1.
With the cursor inside the effective display area, spin the scrollwheel to show Tgt Cancel /L = All in the
guidance area.
2.
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the TT or reference target to cancel tracking.
3.
TT TARGET menu
2. Use the scrollwheel to select Cancel All.
3. Push the scrollwheel to cancel tracking on all TTs.
4.6
Manual Acquisition
Maximum 100 targets may be acquired manually depending on the acquisition condition set on the TT TGT menu.
Note: Targets cannot be acquired manually using acquisition condition "Auto 100". Also, you cannot acquire targets
automatically in acquisition condition "Manual 100".
4.6.1
1. Use the trackball to select the TT ACQ mode box at the right side of the screen then push the right button to
show the TT TARGET menu.
TT TARGET menu
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select MAN 100, AUTO 25, AUTO 50 or AUTO 75 as appropriate then push the
scrollwheel.
4-5
4.6.2
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
2.
By trackball
1. With the cursor inside the effective display area, spin the scrollwheel to show "Tgt Acquire" in the guidance
area.
2. Use the trackball to put the cursor on the target you want to acquire.
3. Push the left button to acquire the target.
The plotting symbol is drawn by broken lines during the initial acquisition stage. A vector appears in about one
minute after acquisition indicating the target's motion trend. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes,
the plotting symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target symbol blinks.
TT
Symbol
Meaning
Immediately after acquisition, this plotting symbol is shown in broken lines.
Within one minute after acquisition, a vector appears to show a trend of
movement.
Within three minutes after acquisition, the plotting symbol changes to a small
circle, indicating steady-state tracking condition.
Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target to be acquired should be within 0.1 to 24 nm (or 32 nm, depending on
initial setting) from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached, the message "TT MAN ACQ 100% full" is displayed
at the screen bottom. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets if you wish to acquire additional targets manually.
CAUTION
Target Swap
When a target being tracked nears another
target being tracked, the targets may be
"swapped". When two targets acquired
either automatically or manually come close
to each other, one of the two may become
a Lost Target. Should this happen, manual
re-acquisition of the Lost Target may be
required after the two have separated.
4-6
4.7
4.7.1
TT symbols
Steady tracking
CPA alarm
(flashing)
(flashing)
Manually
acquired targets
(flashing)
CPA alarm
(collision course)
Lost target
(flashing)
Acquisition zone
(flashing)
Target selected
for data readout
Reference target
On target passing
through operator-set
acquisition zone
Trial maneuver
TT performance test
S
(flashing)
On selected target
On reference target
Bottom center
Bottom center
After
acquisition,
changes to
"O" R
T
(flashing)
Remarks
Broken circle around an echo to indicate the target
under acquisition and initial stage of tracking,
before steady-state tracking.
Within one minute after acquisition (vector still
unreliable).
Solid circle with vector indicating steady state
tracking (within three minutes after acquisition).
Plotting symbol (red) flashes to indicate the target is
predicted to come into CPA or TCPA.
4-7
4.7.2
1.
TT symbol brilliance
Use the trackball to select the BRILLIANCE box at the left side of the screen then push the right button.
BRILLIANCE menu
2. Use the trackball to select TGT, Danger then spin the scrollwheel to adjust brilliance.
3. Click the Close window button (X) to close the menu.
4-8
4.7.3
You can select the color and size of the TT symbol as follows:
1.
Use the trackball to select the Symb DISP box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
4-9
4.8
4.8.1
By keyboard
Use the trackball to put the cursor on a desired TT then push the TARGET DATA key.
By trackball
To erase data from the data box, choose target for which to erase its data then push the scrollwheel.
The basic target display dialog box for a TT consists of the following information:
Targets number. Target numbering starts from "1". When a target is erased the number will not be reused until
the power is re-set or more than 100 targets are acquired.
Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
True speed (SOG) and true course (COG) of the target
CPA and TCPA. A negative TCPA value means that you have already passed the closest point and the TT is going
away from own ship.
Bow Closest Range (BCR) and Bow Closest Time (BCT)
TT display window
The detailed target display dialog box for a TT displays the contents of the basic TT display plus the following
information. To display detailed information, put the cursor on the data display then push the left button.
Target status can be Query, Tracking, Lost, Dangerous. "Query" indicates a new target for which there is not yet
enough tracking history to have target speed, course, CPA and TCPA available.
Position of target (Lat, Lon)
4-10
4.8.2
By trackball
1.
Put the cursor in the TGT LIST box at the right side of the screen.
2.
Refresh
Refresh
Refresh
3.
If there is more than one page of data, use << or >> to scroll the list.
4.
5.
Click the Close window button (X) to close the list, or wait 30 seconds for the window to close automatically.
4-11
4.9
Vector Modes
Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (Relative) or north (True).
4.9.1
Description of vectors
True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor remain stationary on
the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed
targets representing the reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly entered.
In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization (T VECT(G)) and sea stabilization
(T VECT(S)). The stabilization mode is automatically selected according to speed selection, as shown in the table
below. For speed selection, see section 2.5 How to Input Your Ship's Speed.
Speed selection
LOG(WT)
LOG(BT)
POSN
REF
MAN
MAN w/set & drift
Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, navigational marks and ships at anchor
will represent the reciprocal of own ships ground track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a
collision course. (Dotted lines in the figure are for explanation only.)
Buoy
Buoy
Target on
collision
course
Own ship
True vectors in
head-up mode
4-12
Target on
collision
course
Own ship
Relative vectors in
head-up mode
4.9.2
Vectors may be displayed in true or relative motion. Vector time (or the length of vectors) can be set between 30
seconds and 60 minutes.
Push the VECTOR MODE key consecutively to select relative or true vector mode. Your selection is shown in
the Vector motion box. (Note that this also selects the vector mode for the past position display.)
2.
Push the VECTOR TIME key. Your selection appears in the vector length box (see the illustration below).
By trackball
1.
Use the trackball to select relative or true mode at the right side of the screen.
AUTO
MAN
TT VECTOR box
2.
3.
4.
5.
4-13
4.10
The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions of any targets being tracked.
If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes the course, its plotted course will not be a
straight line. See the illustration below for dot pattern and ship status.
Past position orientation, true or relative, is controlled with TRAIL MODE on the TRAIL menu.
4.10.1
1. Use the trackball to select the Past Posn indication at the right side of the screen.
AUTO
MAN
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
Available setting
4-14
4.10.2
You can select the interval of past position points and style of past position points.
1.
Use the trackball to select the Symb DISP box at the right side of the screen then push the left button. Select the
Tracking page.
2.
Select the Density box in the Target past positions window, spin the scrollwheel to select Sparse, Medium or
Dense as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Select the Style box, spin the scrollwheel to select Points or Points and dots as appropriate then push the
scrollwheel.
4.
Click the Close window button (X) at the upper right corner to close the menu.
4-15
4.11
Predictor
The Predictor, shown in the sidebar, can be used to estimate own ship position in the future (30-180 seconds). To
show the Predictor on the display, own ship symbol must be as "true scale symbol". The Predictor is displayed using
five own ship symbols ahead in yellow color.
4.11.1
Predictor settings
Put the cursor on the text "Predictor" in the sidebar then use left mouse button to toggle the predictor ON/OFF. The
current setting is shown in the mouse functions area. To set the time for the predictor, put the cursor on the time
indication next to Predictor, spin the scrollwheel to choose a time then push the scrollwheel. The time from current
position to the last of the predicted position may be chosen between 30 and 180 seconds, in 30-second intervals. The
on-screen Predictor graphic consists of five pieces of your ships drawn in true scale to successive future positions.
Current position
4-16
4.12
Set, the direction in which a water current flows. The value can be manually entered in 0.1-degree steps. Drift, in
another word Rate, the speed of a tide, can also be entered manually in 0.1-knot steps.
Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and target data. Refer to the tide table
on board the ship for setting information. These values are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors,
set and drift values should be adjusted until they lose vectors.
Note: Set and drift can be entered manually only if no positioning sensor is selected for use. Otherwise, the system
calculates set and drift automatically.
To enter set and drift manually, do the following:
1. Put the cursor on the Position field in the information area
2. Push the right button. Left-click the arrows at top right corner of the SENSORS dialog box to select the Others
page.
1. Check the Manual box in the Set and Drift window. Close the SENSORS dialog box.
2. Use the trackball to select the SET box at the right side of the screen.
SET box
3. Use the scrollwheel to set value, spinning it to select numeral then pushing it to set.
(Setting range: 000.0 359.9 (T))
4. Use the trackball to select the DRIFT box at the right side of the screen.
DRIFT box
5. Use the scrollwheel to set value, spinning it to select numeral then pushing it to set.
(Setting range: 00.0 99.9(kn))
Note: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness.
4-17
4.13
CAUTION
CPA/TCPA Alarm
The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should
never be relied upon as the sole means
for detecting risk of collision. The
navigator is not relieved of the responsibility to keep visual lookout for
avoiding collisions, whether or not the
radar or other navigation aid is in use.
4.13.1
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
4-18
4.14
The acquisition zone functions both to alert you targets in a specific area and acts as an automatic acquisition area
when automatic target acquisition is active. Any targets entering the zone will be automatically acquired.
When a target enters an acquisition zone, the buzzer sounds and the indication TT target in ACQ ZONE (or AIS
target in ACQ ZONE) appears (in yellow) in the Alert Box. The symbol of the offending target is red and flashing.
Further, the AIS display is automatically turned on if it is off.
4.14.1
One or two acquisition zones may be set, and the maximum range for AZ1 is 6 nm and 24 nm for AZ2.
The procedure below shows how to set an acquisition zone, using the example at the bottom of the page.
1. Use the trackball to select AZ1 box at the right side of the screen.
AZ1
AZ2
AZ status:
Blank: AZ off
SET:
Set AZ
WORK: AZ active
SLEEP: AZ asleep
AZ boxes
2. Push the left button. The AZ box now reads "As SET."
3. Use the trackball to put the cursor on point A then push the left button.
4. Use the trackball to put the cursor on point B then push the left button.
The GZ box now reads "WORK."
Acquisition zone
Note 1: If you wish to create an acquisition zone having a 360-degree coverage around own ship, set point B in
almost the same direction (approx. 3) as point A then push the left button.
Note 2: If the range scale is changed to less than half of the acquisition zone, the AZ box reads "OUT." If the left
button is pushed in this state, the acquisition alarm zone goes into "sleep" state (inactive) and the guidance area
reads "AZ WORK L = DELETE."
4-19
4.14.2
1.
2.
4.14.3
To acknowledge and silence the acquisition zone audio alarm, push the ALARM ACK key, or select the ALARM
ACK box then push the left button.
4.14.4
TT+AIS menu
3. In the Acquisition Zone window, select how to stabilize the acquisition zone, with heading or to North. Spin the
scrollwheel to select Stab Hag or Stab N(orth) as appropriate then push the scrollwheel.
4. Click the Close window button (X) to close the menu.
4-20
4.15
TT Alerts
There are nine situations that cause the TT to trigger visual and audio alarms. To silence the audio alarm, push the
ALARM ACK key, or select the ALARM ACK box then push the left button.
TT alerts
Message no.
Message
Alert category
Description
110
TT dangerous target
Alarm
A TT is on collision course.
111
Warning
112
TT lost target
Warning
114
Warning
115
Warning
116
Warning
117
Warning
118
TT System error
Warning
120
Warning
4-21
4.16
Trial Maneuver
The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect of own ships movement against all TTs, without interrupting the
updating of target information. It is available for use with the TT and AIS functions. For more accurate results, use
relative motion and sea stabilization (ground tracking).
4.16.1
Delay time = 2 m 30 s.
Present own
ship position
4-22
Position of target A
at end of trial
maneuver
Delay time
Current position
of your ship
A
T
4.16.2
Use the trackball to select the MENU box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
TT+AIS menu
3. Select the setting of Mode in the Trial window, select Static or Dynamic as appropriate then push the
scrollwheel.
4. Set trial speed rate with the scrollwheel: Spin the scrollwheel to select numeral; push the scrollwheel to set.
5. Set trial turn rate with the scrollwheel: Spin the scrollwheel to select numeral; push the scrollwheel to set. Two
sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided. Enter the data by sets as shown in the figure
below. This is done to provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ships speed.
4-23
Set 1
Set 2
Set 1
Set 2
6. Click the Close window button (X) to close the menu. Then, the TRIAL box appears at the right side of the
display.
TRIAL box
7. Use the trackball to select the TRIAL box then push the scrollwheel to display TRIAL SET. Then, the TRIAL
box reads TRIAL SET and boxes appear above the TRIAL box as below.
Trial time
TRIAL 00:00
Delay time for trial maneuver
DELAY 00:30
86.8T
06.5kn
Speed for trial maneuver
Boxes for setting trial maneuver parameters
8. Use the scrollwheel to select delay time at DELAY. This is the time after which own ship takes a new situation,
not the time the simulation begins. Change the delay time according to own ship loading condition, etc. Spin the
scrollwheel to select numeric; push the scrollwheel to set.
9. Use the trackball to select the course-setting box. Use the scrollwheel to set the course: Spin the scrollwheel to
select location; push the scrollwheel to set.
10. Use the trackball to select the speed-setting box. Use the scrollwheel to set the speed: Spin the scrollwheel to
select location; push the scrollwheel to set.
Note: Course and speed may also be set with the EBL and VRM, respectively. Put the cursor in any one
of the four trial maneuver related boxes and operate applicable control.
11. Select TRIAL SET. Push the left button or the scrollwheel. The TRIAL box shows "TRAIL 00:00" (00:00 is
trial maneuver time).
The time indication depends on trial mode:
Dynamic mode: The position of your ship and TTs is updated and displayed every 30 seconds.
Static mode: The position of your ship and TTs when set course and speed are reached are displayed. The progress
time until the position is reached is indicated on the display. The trial time can be changed from the Trial Time box.
Put the cursor in the Trial Time box and roll the scrollwheel. The position of targets at the end of selected time is
shown. Increase or decrease the time to get a safe manuever. When the cursor is removed from the box the original
positions of your ship and TTs are restored. If a manuever is unsafe, change speed, course and delay until it is safe.
The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the screen. The time appears at the top
right side of the display. If any TT is predicted to be on a collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship
comes within preset CPA/TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol flashes. If this happens, change own ship's trial
speed, course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver.
4-24
4.17
TT Performance Test
A test program is provided for assessing overall performance of the TT. Normal operation is suspended and the
indication "S" appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the test. The test may be terminated at any
time.
1.
Use the trackball to select the MENU box then push the left button.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel to select Initial Settings then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Use the trackball to select the small black triangle on the Initial Settings menu.
4.
5.
"S" flickers during the test. It takes approximately three minutes for all vectors to be displayed. The test does
not need echo signals, gyro nor speed log input. Three targets having different speeds and courses, as shown in
the table below, are simulated automatically, together with current targets. These targets can be treated as you
would an ordinary TT you can cancel them, display their data, etc.
6.
To terminate the test, push the STBY TX key or select the TX STBY box at the bottom left corner then push the left
button.
Select any simulated target with the cursor and check that the selected target shows the course and speed as in the
table. CPA and TCPA shown in the table are with ships speed of 0 kn. These values change with time and own
ship's movement.
Range
Bearing
Speed
Course
CPA
TCPA
Target A
3.0
45.0
20.0
0.0
2.1
-6.4
Target B
2.0
120.0
5.0
120.0
0.0
-24.0
Target C
7.0
270.0
100.0
120.0
3.5
3.5
A
C
4-25
4.18
The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates radar echoes on the basis of
their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent
are usually land and are displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes that are less than this
dimension are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small circles superimposed over the video
echo.
When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a course vector as more
information is collected. In accordance with the International Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
(IMO TT) requirements, an indication of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of antenna and full
vector accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TTs comply with these requirements.
Quantization
The entire picture is converted to a digital from called "Quantized Video." A sweep range is divided into small
segments and each range element is "1" if there is radar echo return above a threshold level, or "0" if there is no
return.
The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the antenna scans, if there are five
consecutive radar pulses with 1s indicating an echo presence at the exact same range, a target "start" is initiated.
Since receiver noise is random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an echo.
The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet and most distant edges of the echo. At
the end of the scanning of the echo, the discriminator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total
angular extent subtended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or angular
width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared to be a coastline and the closet edge is put into memory as a
map of the area. This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship-sized echoes beyond the
closest coast outline. Five consecutive scans of coastal outline are retained in memory to allow for signal variation.
All smaller echoes are declared to be ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise range
and bearing coordinates of each echo on every scan. This range/bearing data is matched to previous data and
analyzed from scan-to-scan for consistency. When it is determined to be as consistent as a real target, automatic
acquisition occurs and tracking is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the relative
course and speed of the target.
The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed inputs, and the resulting course
and speed of each TT is easily computed by vector summing of the relative motion with own ships course and
speed. The resulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the TTs. This process is updated continually for
each target on every scan of the radar.
4-26
4.19
Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because distant wave clutter, not
eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.
Rain and snow
Clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the A/C RAIN control. If it is heavy rain, switch to S-band if
provided, or switch on the interference rejector on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual
acquisition. Accuracy can be affected.
Low clouds
Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the A/C RAIN control.
Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.
Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at long distance. TT display will
be missing on one or more targets that could only be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were
increased.
The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on the radar PPI and be clearly
visible and well defined.
Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automatic acquisition is done when
the target is detected 5-7 times continuously. Tracking is achieved when the target is detected five times (not
necessarily continuously) out of 10 scans. If not detected six times out of 10 scans, the target will become a "lost
target." The TT will acquire a radar echo that is present once in every six antenna scans and continue tracking if 1 in
10.
4-27
4-28
5. AIS Operation
An AIS transponder can be connected to the Chart Radar to display AIS targets received from the AIS transponder.
The Chart Radar can store up to 1,500 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this buffer becomes full of AIS
targets, the Alert 639 is generated to alert you to full storage buffer. The storage buffer contains automatic dead
reckoning for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed Over Ground (SOG), Course Over Ground (COG),
Rate Of Turn (ROT) and heading. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc.
The CPA and TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets.
The chart radar can display AIS targets that are within the operator-defined range (max. range is 48 nm). The
maximum number of targets that can be displayed is 240 and the operator may choose the number of targets to
display. Alert 637 is generated when there are more than the operator-specified amount of AIS targets within the
operator-chosen range.
The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course of tracked AIS target. The table
below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the chart radar
defines which AIS targets are in tracking, lost or deleted. When you acknowledge a lost target alert, AIS symbol will
be removed from the display. If lost target is not acknowledged, automatic removal of AIS symbol is done as shown
table below.
Type of Ship
IMO nominal
reporting
interval
10 s
6s
2s
3 min
Lost target
indication
(reporting
interval >)
50 s
30 s
10 s
10 min
Pre-set rate
for automatic
removal of
lost target
430 s
430 s
430 s
36 min
10 s
50 s
36 min
3 min
30 s
3 min
30 s
15 s
5s
N/A
3 min
10 s
10 s
N/A
10 min
150 s
10 min
150 s
75 s
25 s
10 min
10 min
50 s
50 s
10 min
36 min
430 s
36 min
430 s
430 s
430 s
36 min
30 min
430 s
430 s
30 min
An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either
Class A AIS
Class B AIS
Additionally the AIS transponder receives messages from ships and these non-ships:
AIS Base station
AIS on airborne SAR craft
AIS on ATON (AIS aid to navigation)
There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets, and of those only a few will be significant for
your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the Chart Radar display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS
targets" is available. Initially any new AIS target received by an AIS transponder is not active (="sleeping"). Such
non-active targets are shown with a small triangle. User can pick any AIS target and change it from non-active to
5-1
5. AIS Operation
active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle with speed vector, headline, rot indicator, etc. Further, the
operator can pick active AIS targets and change their status to non-active.
An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When 95% of user set limit is
reached for displayed AIS targets, the alert "636 AIS display 95% full" appears. When user set limit is reached, the
alert "637 AIS display 100% full" appears.
An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached. The alert "638 AIS storage
95% full" will be given when 95% of 1,500 targets are in storage buffer and the alert "639 AIS storage 100% full"
will be given when 1,500 targets or more are in storage buffer.
Chart Radar generates AIS-related alerts and these are "Alert 632: AIS dangerous target" and "Alert 633: AIS lost
target". Only active AIS targets generate alerts. The operator can enable or disable AIS target alerts as desired. The
feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets that need
supervision. The Chart Radar further eases the task of the operator by automatically changing non-active targets to
active targets, if they meet the dangerous target limits set by CPA and TCPA.
5.1
Control unit
The AIS uses the keys shown below.
BRILL
OFF
A/C RAIN
A/C SEA
GAIN
ON
EBL
OFF
ON
1
HL
OFF
2
EBL
OFFSET
MODE
F1
F2
4
OFF
CENTER
5
CU/TM
RESET
6
INDEX
LINE
F3
F4
7
VECTOR
TIME
8
VECTOR
MODE
9
TARGET
LIST
ALARM
ACK
STBY
TX
CANCEL
TRAILS
ENTER
BRILL
MARK
VRM
MENU
ACQ
TARGET
DATA
RANGE
TARGET
CANCEL
ACQ:
TARGET DATA:
5-2
5. AIS Operation
5.2
Use the trackball to set the cursor on the AIS status indication in the information area. Long-push the left button to
display FUNC OFF. To activate AIS, push the left button again.
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
Note: You cannot enable AIS if any of the items listed below are active.
Manual speed
Manual set & drift
Speed from reference targets
The message shown right appears if you try to activate the AIS function when the above-mentioned items are active.
5.3
Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be displayed on the display. Put the cursor on the AIS
status indication in the information area then push the left mouse button to select an option :DISP OFF, DISP FIL,
or DISP ALL. DISP FIL filters AIS targets according to the settings on the AIS filter dialog box (see the procedure
below.)
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
5-3
5. AIS Operation
5.4
AIS Symbols
When the AIS is turned on, AIS targets are marked with appropriate AIS symbol as below.
SYMBOL
STATUS
REMARKS
Activated
target
ROT higher
than preset
ROT
Dangerous
target
Lost target
+
+
Virtual AtoN
Base Station
AIS symbols
Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is switched off. When the AIS is
again turned on, symbols are immediately displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when the heading is changed from the
Head-up mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the message "AIS receive error" appears in the text window. Check the AIS
transponder.
5-4
5. AIS Operation
5.5
If the screen becomes cluttered with AIS targets, you can filter out unnecessary AIS targets from the AIS filter page.
1. Right-click the AIS setting indication in the information area to show the AIS filter page, shown below.
Max. count
Max. range
Priority
Speed min
Length min
2. Check desired categories of AIS targets to show on the display, in the "AIS filter" field.
3. Select maximum number and maximum range of AIS symbols to show on the display.
4. Set Priority to select the filtering method (CPA, TCPA or RANGE), using the scrollwheel or the left button.
5. Set minimum speed and maximum length of AIS targets to show.
The next several pages show examples of how targets are filtered using various filtering methods.
Filtered by CPA
Filtered by Range
Filtered by TCPA
Note: On S57 charts, AIS and TT are displayed on top of the chart scale 1:1,000,001.
5-5
5. AIS Operation
The left illustration shows AIS targets with "Outlines" and the right illustration shows AIS targets with "point
symbols". Note that your ship and AIS targets are displayed as true scale symbol if the displayed chart scale is larger
than set with "Ship true symbol scale" limit on the Tracking page in the Chart Display dialog box and if the size of
the true scale symbol is larger than 6 mm on the chart display.
5-6
5. AIS Operation
5.6
When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, an activated targets course and speed are shown with a
vector. You can easily judge target movement by monitoring the vector.
5.6.1
On the AIS data box, click check mark to activate corresponding target. Alternatively, left-click the symbol of the
target to activate.
Activated target
5.6.2
1.
Use the trackball to select the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
2.
Push the right button to open the AIS Target dialog box.
3.
Spin the scrollwheel to select Activate All then push the scrollwheel.
Dangerous target
When an activated target violates the CPA/TCPA
alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous
target symbol (red and flashing) and the indication
"AIS Dangerous target" appears.
Press the [ALARM ACK] key (or click the ALARM
ACK box with the left button) to acknowledge the
CPA/TCPA alarm. The audible alarm is silenced
and the symbol stops flashing.
Take appropriate action to avoid collision.
5-7
5. AIS Operation
5.7
5.7.1
You can "sleep" an activated AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with targets that might prevent
important radar and AIS displays from being identified. Note that targets that have been activated automatically
cannot be "slept."
1.
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the activated AIS target that you want to sleep.
2.
Push the scrollwheel. The selected target symbol is then enclosed in a dashed square and AIS data is displayed
in the AIS data box.
Sleeping target
3. Uncheck ship name you want to sleep.
5.7.2
1.
Use the trackball to select the AIS DISP box at the right side of the screen.
5-8
5. AIS Operation
5.8
5.8.1
Basic data
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the AIS target symbol you want to know its data.
2.
By trackball
Use the trackball to put the cursor on an AIS target symbol then push the scrollwheel. The selected target is marked
with a broken square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected.
5-9
5. AIS Operation
5.8.2
1.
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the desired AIS target in the data box at the right side of the screen.
2.
Detailed TT data
5-10
5. AIS Operation
5.9
A dangerous AIS target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA and TCPA limits set in the
information area. A dangerous AIS target is displayed as a blinking target symbol in green and red alternately as
long as you acknowledge the "AIS dangerous target" alert. Then the target symbol is displayed in red color.
You can activate or deactivate the audio alarm for dangerous targets.
5.9.1
You can set CPA and TCPA limits, in the information area.
1. Put the cursor on the text "CPA OFF" then left-click to get the distance and time fields.
2. Put the cursor on the distance value and use the scrollwheel to set distance for CPA.
3. Put the cursor on the time value and use the scrollwheel to set the TCPA.
AUTO
MAN
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
5.9.2
xx.xx xx.xx
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
You can enable or disable the danger alarm (buzzer) for dangerous AIS targets as follows:
Set the cursor on the text "CPA" then right-click to get the Target alerts dialog box.
5-11
5. AIS Operation
5.9.3
You can get automatic activation of a sleeping AIS target when it is within the set CPA limit. The options are OFF,
FILT or ALL.
OFF activates no AIS targets inside the CPA limit
ALL activates all AIS targets inside the CPA limit
FILT activates the AIS targets inside CPA limit that meet conditions set for CPA auto activate.
Select the setting for CPA auto activation as follows
1. Put the cursor on the text "CPA auto act." then left-click to select desired option (OFF, FILT, ALL).
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
2. For FILT, you can set additional conditions for AIS target. Put the cursor on the text "CPA auto act." then rightclick to open the CPA auto activate dialog box.
3. Set desired additional conditions for auto activation of AIS target (sleeping target->active target).
5-12
5. AIS Operation
5.10
You can adjust the brilliance and select the size and color of the AIS symbol.
5.10.1
1. Use the trackball to select the BRILL box at the left side of the screen then push the right button.
BRILLIANCE menu
2. Select TGT, Danger then spin the scrollwheel to adjust brilliance.
3. Click the Close window button (X) to finish.
5-13
5. AIS Operation
5.10.2
You can select the size and color of the AIS symbol as follows:
You can specify the number of AIS targets to show as follows:
1. In the radar or chart radar mode, use the trackball to select the Symb DISP box at the right side of the screen
then push the left button. For the ECDIS mode, show Symbol Display/Info in the guidance area, push the left
button then click Chart Display on the menu.
2. Open the Targets page.
Targets page
3. Select the color for AIS targets with Color, from among green, blue, cyan, magenta and white.
4. You can set the limit for the ROT to display the curved speed vector.
5. Open the General page.
6. You turn the outlines (symbol minimum size is limited; width is more than 7.5 mm) of the AIS symbol on or off
as appropriate.
7. Click the Close window button (X) to close the menu.
5-14
5. AIS Operation
5.11
A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or five reporting
intervals, whichever is the shorter. When this occurs, the target is marked with the (flashing)
lost target symbol and the indication "AIS lost target" appears.
To acknowledge a lost target, push the ALARM ACK key or use the trackball to select the
ALARM ACK box then push the left button.
Time out for indication of lost active AIS target is as shown in the table below:
Vessel speed (kn)
at anchor
18 min
0-14
60 s
14-23
36 s
> 23
12 s
Automatic removal of lost active AIS target occurs under the following conditions:
When the user acknowledges "Lost AIS target" alert for active AIS target.
When "Lost AIS target" state has occurred for two minutes.
Exception is moored/anchored active AIS target when time of period is 36 minutes.
Note 1: If a TT lost target mark is displayed when the ALARM ACK key is pushed (or the ALARM ACK box is
clicked) to acknowledge an AIS lost target, the TT lost target will also be erased.
Note 2: The AIS data transmission interval depends on targets speed. For example, the data is transmitted every 10
seconds on the ship speed of 0 to 14 kn and every two seconds on the ship speed of more than 23 knots. For details,
see the owners manual of the AIS.
5.11.1
1. Put the cursor on the text "Lost TGT alarm" then left-click to select desired option (OFF, FILT, ALL).
2. For FILT, you can set additional conditions for lost AIS target and TT. Put the cursor on the text "Lost TGT
alarm." then right-click to open the Lost target alarm dialog box. Set desired additional conditions for lost AIS
target in the AIS field (Max range, Min. ship speed, Exclude class B, and Min. ship length).
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
5-15
5. AIS Operation
5.12
The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of activated AIS targets. If a target
changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Below are sample past position displays.
5.12.1
How to display and erase past position points, select past position
interval
1. Use the trackball to select the Past Posn indication at the right side of the screen.
AUTO
MAN
xx.xx xx.xx
Available setting
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 min
5-16
5. AIS Operation
5.12.2
You can select the interval of past positions points and style of past position points.
1.
Use the trackball to select the Symb DISP box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
2.
3.
Use the trackball to select the value of "Target past positions" for Density and Style in the Target past positions
window.
4.
5-17
5. AIS Operation
5.13
AIS targets vector can be displayed relative to your ship's heading (R VECT) or with reference to the North (T
VECT).
Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set on the sidebar, at the locations circled in the
illustration below.
AUTO
MAN
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
5.14
An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display. This is because the AIS ship
position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) on that ship whereas the radar detects the same ship by PPI principle
(range and bearing relative to own ship radar antenna).
To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, the "association" function is
incorporated. If target data from both AIS and radar plotting functions are available and if the association criteria are
fulfilled, only the activated AIS target symbol is presented.
Association will not happen between AIS and TTs if:
AIS target is sleeping
AIS target is lost
5.14.1
1.
xx.xx xx.xx
xx.xx xx.xx
xx.xx xx.xx
2. Push left button once to get "<" sign to select AIS symbol for associated target, push left button once more to
get ">" sign to select TT symbol for associated target, push left button once again to deactivate target
association.
3. Use the trackball to select the Symb DISP box at the right side of the screen then push the left button.
5-18
5. AIS Operation
5-19
5. AIS Operation
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the AIS target symbol you want to know its data.
2.
By trackball
Use the trackball to put the cursor on an AIS target symbol then push the scrollwheel. The selected target is marked
with a broken square and AIS data is shown in the AIS data box when the target is correctly selected. Ship name is
shown near the target. If ship name is not available, MMSI no. appears.
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the desired AIS target in the data box at the right side of the screen.
2.
The Targets dialog box shows information from AIS and TTs. Left hand side is data from AIS target and right hand
side data from TT.
5-20
5. AIS Operation
5.15
Own ship information sent by the AIS transponder can be modified in Chart Radar. This information contains
voyage related data and ship related data. To view or modify own ship information, do following:
1. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse button to open the
Main menu.
2.
Choose AIS Own Ship Info from the menu then push the scrollwheel to show the AIS Own Ship Info
dialog box, consisting of the pages "Voyage" and "Own Ship".
3. If you need to change any information, check the "Enable changes" box then modify desired field.
5-21
5. AIS Operation
5.16
5.16.1
Introduction
You can send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination (MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships
in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages
are also permitted. Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information. They
do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS.
To open the Safety message menu, which is where all phases of AIS safety messages are initiated, do the following:
1.
Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button
to open the Main menu.
2.
Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel to show the
SAFETY MESSAGE dialog box.
5-22
5. AIS Operation
5.16.2
You can create a safety message for transmission by the AIS transponder. This can be done as follows:
1.
Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button
to open the Main menu.
2.
Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the menu to show the submenu.
4.
Select Create Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
Address box
Message type box
Channel box
5.
6.
Put the cursor in the Address box. Spin the scrollwheel to select Addressed
to MMSI or Broadcast to All as appropriate then push the scrollwheel. Select
Addressed to MMSI to send the message to a specific ship (AIS equipped) or
Broadcast to All to send to all nearby AIS transponder-equipped ships. For
Addressed to MMSI, enter MMSI of ship in the MMSI input box, in the
Vessel window.
7.
Select message type at Message type box: Safety message for safety
message, Binary message for routine message.
8.
At the Channel box, select channel over which to broadcast your message.
The choices are Channel A; Channel B; Channel A and Channel B and Dont
care for channel.
9.
Enter the text of your message in the box below Channel. The number of
characters that may be entered depends on message type.
Safety message broadcast:
161 characters
Binary message broadcast:
156 characters
Safety message addressed to MMSI: 156 characters
Binary message addressed to MMSI: 151 characters
5-23
5. AIS Operation
10. To send the message, put the cursor on the triangle to show the sub menu, select Send then push the
scrollwheel.
11. If message is sent successfully, status is changed from Unsent to Sent.
Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button to open the Main menu.
2.
Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Put the cursor on a desired AIS target on the display then push the scrollwheel to get MMSI number, call sign
and ship name of the target. Call sign and MMSI of the ship selected are shown in the Vessel field in the Safety
Message menu.
4.
To send a message to the ship, select Addressed to MMSI from the Address box and set other items as
appropriate, referring to the procedure on the preceding page.
5.16.3
When a message is received by AIS, it is indicated on the chart radar with the alert "634 AIS message received". To
read the message, do the following:
1.
Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button
to open the Main menu.
2.
Select Safety Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
In the Filter field, select "Received" from the topmost box and the message
in the Name box below it.
SAFETY MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Filter
Unread
Name
S17052004-104716
Status: Unread
Vessel
ARCTIC SUN
Call Sign: ELQB8
MMSI:
636009927
Addressed to MMSI
Safety Message
ENGINE IS NOT
RUNNING
Enable changes
5-24
5. AIS Operation
5.16.4
Open the menu and show the Safety Message dialog box.
2.
In the Filter field, select "Received" from the topmost box and the message
to reply to in the Name box below it.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
5-25
5. AIS Operation
5.17
AIS Alerts
AIS alerts are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. The table below shows the AIS alerts and their
meanings.
AIS alerts
Message no.
Message
Alert category
Description
632
AIS dangerous
target
Alarm
633
Warming
634
AIS message
received
Warming
635
AIS target in
ACQ ZONE
Warming
636
Warming
637
Warming
638
Warming
639
Alarm
737
Warming
5-26
6. ECDIS Overview
6.1
ECDIS Overview
The ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems) screen is divided into several areas. The Status
bar, which is always shown at the top of the screen, mainly displays equipment status.
The boxes at the right side of the screen comprise the Information areas. They are permanently displayed and show
information such as own ship position, alerts generated by the system, and cursor position. The operator may display
the data of his or her choice in one of the information areas called a Sidebar. (See section 6.1.3 Sidebar on user
interface.) The bottom block in the information area is the Guidance area, and it shows the current left button,
scrollwheel and right functions, from left to right.
The Electronic chart area takes up 7/8 of the ECDIS display.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(WT)
Information
area
6-1
6. ECDIS Overview
2.
Planned route
3.
4.
The ECDIS combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that modern navigation systems (e.g.,
differential GPS) may offer more accurate positioning than what was used to position some of the surveys from
which the electronic navigational chart was derived.
S57 vector format
ECDIS is compatible with S57 release 3 ENC format charts. From this format the ECDIS generates the "system
ENC", = SENC, which is used for actual operations of the ECDIS.
When opening a chart it is displayed with the default scale called the compilation scale. The details for the chart are
displayed in the electronic chart area and these can be modified. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN
and ZOOM OUT functions, and the scale range is 1:1,000 - 1:50,000,000.
6.1.1
User interface
The user interface is defined as the areas that are not displaying the electronic chart.
The user interface contains information about settings, parameters and selections used by ECDIS. The nature of the
information displayed can be either static (such as name of a certain window, fields in chart legend, units, etc.) or
dynamic (such as position of own ship, time, user selections, etc.).
With any palette selection except Day Bright, static text from dynamic text is shown in different colors to help you
distinguish between them. For example, dynamic data like own ship position, time or direct control of parameters
(scale, predictor time, etc.) is shown in yellow color.
To choose a color palette, do the following:
1.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel until Chart Display/Info/Standard Display is shown in the guidance area.
3.
Push the left button to open the Chart Display dialog box.
4.
If the "Chart" page is not selected, click an arrow tab in the dialog box to display it.
5.
6.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired palette, referring to the table on the previous page, then push the
scrollwheel.
7.
Click the Close window button (X) at the top right corner of the dialog box to close the box.
Note: The display colors may change to the Windows standard color palette whenever a USB memory device is
inserted or removed. (When Windows initiates USB recognition procedures, the Windows standard color palette is
restored.) To restore the ECDIS color palette, open the Chart Display menu and follow the procedure on the
previous page.
6-2
6. ECDIS Overview
6.1.2
Information area
The information area displays details about own ship position, course and speed and the cursor's location on the
chart
Information from the positioning sensors:
HDG heading and its source if it is not true gyro.
SPD longitudinal speed
SB, Transversal speed, positive value to Starboard.
COG (Course over ground) and its source
SOG (Speed over ground)
Latitude and longitude position of own ship
Datum in use (WGS 72, WGS 84, European 1950,
etc.), which is shown above positioning source.
Positioning source: Dead Reckoning, GPS, DGPS,
LORAN, FILTER, etc.
Latitude and longitude position of cursor displayed in
chosen datum.
Range and bearing from your ship's position to cursor
Note: The order of items in the position and cursor
windows can change with the sidebar used. See the next
page.
6-3
6. ECDIS Overview
6.1.3
You can choose what kind of information to display in the sidebar (right side) of the ECDIS. The options shown
below are available and the content of the sidebar windows change with the devices and sensors connected to the
system. The Route display or Autopilot display is displayed always. You can display one of them together with the
Conning display, Docking display or Chart legend. When two sidebars are active, the width of the information area
is doubled, as shown below.
Route display
Autopilot display
Conning display
Docking display
Chart legend
(WT)
Autopilot
display
Conning
display
6-4
6. ECDIS Overview
2.
3.
4.
(WT)
1.
3.
OFF
T VECT(G)
5 min
Predictor
OFF
PASTPOSN T 2min
CPA 10.0NM 30min
CPA AUTO act FILT
Lost TGT alarm FILT
SINGLE xx.xx xx.xx
2.
6-5
6. ECDIS Overview
6-6
6. ECDIS Overview
Transversal
speed (frwd)
Longitudinal
speed
Transversal
speed (aft)
Transversal
speed (frwd)
Depth
Depth (at bow)
Longitudinal
speed
Transversal
speed (aft)
6-7
6. ECDIS Overview
(WT)
SET TIME
Radar
(CALC.)
SENSORS
Alerts
Display
Ref Pt
Alerts
WPT Alerts
WPT
LAT
Mode
LON
RAD/NM CH LIM/m
VRM
MIN/kn MAX/kn
WPT
EBL
Range:
2NM
Info
WPT
WPT count 19
Adjust after
Delete WPT
Display All
LAT
LON
PLAN ROUTE
NM
REF point
centered
WPT
NAV
MARKS
NM
SPD
ALERT
QUEUE
Trial SPD
SPD profile
MON ROUTE
6-8
6. ECDIS Overview
NM
Suggested SPD
kn
Trial SPD
kn
SPD profile
6-9
6. ECDIS Overview
6.1.4
A route, a user chart or Notes can be displayed at the top of the electronic chart, in either the plan mode or the
monitor mode.
To choose desired mode, put the cursor on the text Route, UserChart or Notes in the sidebar. A drop-down dialog
box appears, where you can choose either Monitor or Plan by clicking the appropriate button with the left button.
With User Chart or Notes, only the plan mode or the monitor mode can be displayed in the sidebar. (Display
selected may be activated with a radio button. See the figure below.)
Select Route
Monitor
A
Plan
B
User Chart
Monitor
X
DISP
A1
Plan
DISP
B1
Select Notes
Monitor
X
DISP
Notes1
Plan
DISP
Notes2
6.2
Display and approve dates for S57 charts and manual updates
Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Approve dates for S57 charts as the current date.
There may be features that require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in S57 charts. Accordingly, if you have not
set Display and Approve dates as the current date there is a possibility that you can get a wrong presentation or some
feature may be absent. For how to set Display and Approve dates, see section 7.11 Chart Viewing Dates and
Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart.
6-10
6. ECDIS Overview
6.2.1
6.2.2
Create a new route or modify an existing one. For further information about creating or updating a route, see
Chapter ! ! .
Alerts
Legs: 9
Alerts: 11
Alerts by leg
Legs by alert
Alert:
Alert:
Planned Notes
6-11
6. ECDIS Overview
To store selections on the Alerts page, click the Start button. Also, the name of the user chart and the name of
Notes, which were selected as plan mode, are stored in this route.
6.2.3
Select a route for the next voyage: Select Route in the sidebar and click the Monitor button. For more information
about route selection, see Chapter 11 Route Monitoring.
If the text "Checked conditions differ" appears in the menu, this means that conditions selected during route
planning were different than those selected for use during route monitoring.
6-12
6. ECDIS Overview
6-13
6. ECDIS Overview
6-14
6. ECDIS Overview
6.2.4
The user can select navigation sensors for use in navigation and view their current values. There are "pages" for
speed and course and position. The figure below shows the SPD/CRS page.
Checkbox status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If there is no value shown for a
sensor, it indicates that the sensor is not valid. Note that the content of these pages depends on the sensors that are in
use on the ship.
To display the SENSORS dialog box, put the cursor on the position indication in the information area then push the
right button.
6-15
6. ECDIS Overview
Select the "Primary" navigation sensor as the sensor that is considered to be most accurate and reliable. Set all other
navigation sensors as "Secondary".
6-16
6. ECDIS Overview
6.2.5
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button.
2.
3.
4.
Select appropriate "Counter" item then push the scrollwheel. (The difference between Distance Counter and
Trip Counter is distance counter is the total distance run and trip counter is the distance between random two
points.)
5.
You are then asked if you are sure to reset selected counter. Click the OK button to reset. The prompt window
disappears.
6-17
6. ECDIS Overview
6.2.6
Datum is used to select between different models of the earth. It is essential that you use datum in a uniform way.
If you use paper charts together with electronic chart material, it is recommended that you use the same datum as
your current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic chart system and points taken or plotted on
your current paper chart.
Once you have selected a datum, all numerical latitude-longitude
position values are presented in your selected datum.
To change the datum:
1.
Select the datum indication in the top box in the information area.
2.
6-18
7. Vector Charts
Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as a vector chart. Vector-coded charts are coded using a
variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3 and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative for
SOLAS compliant electronic charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorised
Hydrographic Office, then it is called "ENC". You can read more about ENC and related legal issues in this chapter.
Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred to as "S57 charts" regardless of their source.
Sometimes you can wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your S57 charts. This is
called "manual updates". Also, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for
charts published in different scales from the same area. For further details, see Chapter 8 Manual Updates.
7.1
S57 Charts
7.1.1
Introduction
An ENC could be encrypted to prevent unauthorised use so the user needs a permit to view the ENC. This permit
could be entered manually from the control unit, loaded from a floppy disk, USB memory, or loaded through
telecommunications from an RENC.
Before any ENC can be used in the chart radar, it is loaded into your hard disk and converted into the systems own
internal format (SENC). Some parts of the charts may be date dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they
are visible only for a limited period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with
Display Until and Approve Until dates. In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to
Mariners represent the date dependency described above for S57 charts.
An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds of updates:
1.
2.
Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous base cells and their updates.
All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You control usage of updates in the
electronic chart system from Display Until and Approve Until dates. Using Display Until and Approve Until dates,
you can view your charts correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future.
Chart material will be stored in media such as CD ROMs and floppies, electronically through telecommunications
from RENCs or electronically from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could have arrived from RENCs, CD
ROMs, floppies or USB memories. Such material can contain only basic cells, cells and updates or only updates.
The electronic chart system contains as standard the software required to access CD ROMs, floppies and LAN.
7-1
7. Vector Charts
Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides the chart itself. Typically
additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional
paper chart features that do not have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This chart radar copies
these textual descriptions and pictures into its hard disk so the user may cursor-pick them for viewing purposes.
For how to interpret the S57 ENC chart display, see Appendix 2.
Definitions of terms
Cell
A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name.
Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish.
S57 chart
A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with chart radar
without any authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Office.
ENC
A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with chart radar on the
authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart
information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in addition to
that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be considered necessary for safe
navigation. The name of the coding standard for ENC is S57ed3.
SENC
A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by chart radar for appropriate use, updates
to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is
actually accessed by the chart radar for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may
also contain information from other sources.
RENC
A service provider offering ENC delivery and update service as defined in IHO standard S52e3.
Often an RENC provides both CD ROM and telecommunications-based service to chart radar users.
One example of an RENC is an RENC in Stavanger, Norway, operating under the marketing name
PRIMAR.
7.1.2
The chart legend, which provides various data about the chart currently displayed, can be toggled on and off by
placing the cursor in the sidebar, clicking the right button, choosing Chart Legend from the menu then pushing the
scrollwheel.
This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display.
If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if
appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts
displayed on the electronic chart display area. The information is displayed with reference to own ship position if
automatic TM reset is active, or with reference to the current position of the cursor if automatic TM reset is OFF.
Cell name: Name of chart.
Navigational purpose: S57 charts are compiled for a variety
of navigational purposes. The navigational purpose, for which
an individual S57 chart has been compiled by a Hydrographic
Office, is indicated in this field. Alternatives are: Overview,
General, Coastal, Approach, Harbour and Berthing.
Issue date: Issue date of the base cell of the chart.
Edition number: Edition number of the chart.
Last displayed update: Number of last update, which is
visible on the chart screen.
Update issue date: Issue date of last update, which is visible
on the chart screen.
Last update appl. date: Date to which the last update, which
is visible on the chart screen, is effective.
Projection: Projection of the chart. The projection is always
Mercator.
7-2
7. Vector Charts
Horizontal datum: Horizontal datum of the chart data as published by the chart producer. By definition this must
be WGS 84.
Vertical datum: Vertical datum of the chart.
Sounding datum: Datum used for soundings.
Quality of data: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer.
Magnetic var.: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a
negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction.
Depth: Unit of measurement for depth.
Height: Unit of measurement for height above sea level (for example, clearance height).
7.1.3
Permanent messages help you keep the S57 charts up-to-date and these are shown at the top left corner on the
screen. Permanent messages appear if the system detects a condition that may cause a chart to be not up-to-date.
Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts that have been loaded from
sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to know the exact up-to-date situation.
For further details see section 7.11 Chart Viewing
Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart.
Permanent message
For further details, see section 7.6.3 How to find upto-date status of an RENC product list.
Permanent message
7-3
7. Vector Charts
7.2
7.2.1
Flow chart for how to load S57 charts into chart radar
Load ENC into
ECDIS.
Yes
No
No
Yes
- Highlight desired
ENC in list.
- Press Cell Status
button.
- Open Conv. Log.
Data flow chart, How to load S57 charts into chart radar
7-4
7. Vector Charts
POINT 1
Yes
7-5
7. Vector Charts
7.2.2
How to load S57 charts from a CD ROM, floppy disk, USB memory or
LAN
When you load S57 charts by CD ROM catalogue, the system first loads a CD ROM catalogue, which stores certain
information into your hard disk such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number, from your LAN (Local Area
Network) connection, floppy disk, USB memory, or CD ROM. Then, the system asks which charts you want to load
from the chosen media. After building the CD ROM catalogue, you can view the contents of it by using the Chart
Catalogue command in the Chart menu.
To load by CD ROM catalogue, do the following:
1. Insert CD ROM or floppy disk in respective drive, or connect USB memory. Spin the scrollwheel to show
Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and "from CD ROM" from the sub menu (see bottom figure at
left). The default load source is from CD ROM.
3. Click the Load button to load from a CD ROM. If you want to load from another chart radar using LAN, you
have to change Load Dir. Click the Browse button to choose a new Load Dir.
4. The chart radar loads content summary and Product List from the CD ROM then opens the Load or Update
Charts from CD ROM dialog box.
5. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files associated with charts from the CD ROM catalogue.
The system keeps only the latest version of these. If your system already has newer text or pictures in use, you
will get the notice below.
7-6
7. Vector Charts
5. In the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box, you choose the charts to load into the chart
radar. Then, click the Load button to load those charts. See also "Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from
loaded CD ROM dialog box" on page 7-8.
(WT)
6. Before loading starts (then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked to confirm this
operation.
7-7
7. Vector Charts
7. Click the Yes button. Charts are then loaded and automatically converted to SENC format. The SENC Convert
window appears.
7-8
7. Vector Charts
(WT)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NM
6.
1. The source and edition date of the chart radar are displayed here.
2. A list of charts stored in the CD-ROM, edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the
chart.
3. In the Load Selector field, you can choose how to pick desired charts from the list:
Name: Chart names are displayed on graphical presentation if selected.
Permit: Available charts will be highlighted in the CD-ROM and for which you have permits.
RENC Canceled Charts: The system will display the charts that are canceled on RENC and normally on
CD-ROM.
Group: If you have predefined a group of charts the system will highlight those charts in the group that are
available in the CD-ROM.
Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list.
Missing only: Loads and display on graphical presentation only charts and their updates that are not already
loaded.
4. Other buttons:
View CD-ROM Publisher Notes: View important notices published by chart producer
View CD-ROM content Summary: Provides a list of the charts on the CD ROM that can be used.
Load and Conv. History: Displays the charts on the CD-ROM that have been loaded and converted.
Remove: Remove CD-ROM catalog from this system.
5. The Edit Group button is used to create and modify a group.
6. The Load button is used to start loading.
7.
6.
Note 1: The system can convert into SENC and set the "Display Until" date automatically. This is the recommended
way. For how to do this, see section 7.3.2 How to select automatic SENC conversion and display until date.
7-9
7. Vector Charts
Note 2: You should read the text file associated with each catalogue. The text file typically contains very important
notices for the usage of the charts from the producing Hydrographic Office.
1. Click the View CD ROM Publisher Notes button in the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM
dialog box (see previous page)
2. To close this window, click the Close window button(X) at the upper right corner of the window. You can view
the summary of the contents of the CD ROM. It contains information about charts you are going to load.
3. Click the View CD ROM content Summary button on the S57 load window. Data for the selected CDROM is displayed.
Cell ID: Name of the chart
Edition: Edition number of the chart
Base: Including update number and issue date of base cell of the chart
First Update: Update number and issue date of the first update included
Last Update: Update number and issue date of the last update included
4. If you want to make a hard copy of the Content Summary, hit the Print Text button.
5. To close this window, click the Close window button (X) at the upper right corner of the window.
Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box.
2.
3.
Click the Load and Conv. History button, and window that looks something like the one below appears.
From the list you can verify which charts are already loaded and converted from the CD ROM.
7-10
7. Vector Charts
1.
2.
NM
1. Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. Choose desired CD ROM.
2.
If you want to avoid the very time consuming task of reloading charts that you already have, then you should choose
No (="No for all" option in above window). However if you want to reload charts, then choose Yes (="Yes for all"
option in above window).
7-11
7. Vector Charts
A new edition of the chart has been published and you missed it
If you tried to load updates for a
chart for which you do not have new
enough base cells or reissues in your
hard disk, you will get following
message:
The message above clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements.
Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher immediately.
7-12
7. Vector Charts
7-13
7. Vector Charts
7.2.3
How to load S57 charts that are not fully compliant with the
IMO standards
The chart radar could in some cases load S57 charts that do not have full compliance with S57 standard coding for
transfer media. Minimum requirements for loading manually is legally coded:
XXXXXXXX.000 file, which includes a base cell.
XXXXXXXX.NNN file, in which NNN is a number from 001 to 999, and which includes an update.
To load charts without building a named "CD ROM catalogue" do the following:
1. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and Manual from the sub menu.
7.3
S57 charts from Hydrographic Offices are called ENCs. An ENC has to be converted into SENC format before it
can be used in the chart radar. The chart radar can convert ENC into SENC format automatically. If the conversion
is successful, the Failed SENC conversion window does not appear.
If the system fails to convert ENC into SENC or if the system detects a coding error in an ENC, the Failed SENC
conversion window appears with a list of failed ENCs. In this window you can choose any of the charts to see the
reason for failure in conversion.
Normally the conversion is initiated automatically when a chart is loaded. Section 7.2 How to Load S57 Charts
describes the loading process. Section 7.3.2 How to select automatic SENC conversion and display until date
describes how to choose automatic conversion. You can also initiate conversion from The SENC Convert window
or from a cell status window.
7.3.1
The SENC conversion speed depends about how many other tasks the system is occupied with. The system can
conduct SENC conversion in the background during any other system operations, but you can greatly lessen the time
for SENC conversion by doing the following:
1.
2. Choose display mode (upper left corner on the status bar) as True Motion.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Active Scroll in the guidance area then push the left
button. Set chart center so ship is off the screen or TM reset is OFF.
4. Set the scale to 1:1,000 by displaying Range+/ /Range- in the guidance area then pushing the appropriate button
to display 1:1,000.
7-14
7. Vector Charts
7.3.2
When you are loading new S57 charts base cells and/or their updates into your hard disk, they can be automatically
converted to SENC format. Further, display dates can be set as issue dates automatically. Do the following to set
these options:
1. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse function
area then push the right button.
2. Choose System > SENC Convert Settings from the menu then push the
scrollwheel. The SENC Convert Settings dialog box appears.
3. Check Automatic SENC conversion and Automatic Display Until.
4. Click the X at the top of the dialog box to close the box.
7.3.3
If you want to view the progress of SENC conversion, display the SENC Convert window as follows:
1. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2. Choose SENC Convert from the menu then push the scrollwheel. The SENC Convert window appears.
The example above shows that all SENC conversions have been finished. Then, you can see CD ROM history by
clicking the CD History button. You can view the results of the finished SENC conversions by clicking the Load
and Conv. History button.
7-15
7. Vector Charts
7.3.4
If the system is unable to convert ENC into SENC without any error or failure, the Failed SENC conversion window
appears with a list of failed ENCs. Status of Failure means that the system completely failed to convert the ENC into
the SENC and thus the ENC cannot be used.
Status of Errors means that the system detected minor or major errors in the conversion of the ENC into the SENC.
Check the content of Conv. History and cell status to see if the error was minor or major. Major errors are indicated
as NON ENC in Conv. History. Note that the status of errors together with NON ENC in Conv History clearly
indicate that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. Get the latest edition of this
chart from the publisher immediately.
"Failed" means that the system completely failed to convert the ENC into the SENC and thus the ENC cannot be
used. Failure clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. Get
the latest edition of this chart from the publisher immediately.
The Failed SENC conversion window contains two buttons. Conv. History opens the conversion history log and
Cell Status opens the window of chosen item in the list of Failed SENC conversions window.
The Conv. History button is used to display
the conversion log. The conversion log shows
the status of converted ENCs. For further
details about the results of conversions, see
section 7.3.5 How to use the SENC
conversion history log.
Click the Cell Status button, and a Cell Status window appears.
Then you can click the Conv Log button to view a detailed description of errors and failures detected during SENC
conversion (see example below).
7-16
7. Vector Charts
7.3.5
The system automatically records the results of all conversions into the conversion history log. You can view the
content of this log at any time by doing the following:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2.
Choose SENC Convert from the menu then push the scrollwheel. The SENC Convert window appears.
3.
After conversion (Conversion list becomes empty), click the Conv. History button. A list of converted charts
appears. Note that you can also activate the Conv. History from the "Failed SENC conversions" window.
You can view the status of converted charts on the list, and also source if it is available.
4.
Perfect chart
Successful auto. conv: ENC: GB203000.000, edt:
1, upd:
0 / 1999 4 3
Perfect chart that is produced by a private chart producer (i.e., chart doesn't have ENC
status)
A private chart cannot fulfil SOLAS requirements
Successful auto. conv: ENC: AS31MATT.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 8 NON E
Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable
Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is still ENC.
Successful auto. conv with errors: ENCD ROME416050.000, edt:
3, upd:
0 / 1998 6 12
1, upd:
Failed conversion
Chart is not usable and you cannot view the chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENCD ROMK3EI0XE.000, edt:
1, upd:
0 / 1999 2 17
7-17
7. Vector Charts
2, upd:
1, upd:
1, upd:
Failed conversion. At least one of the previous updates has failed in its SENC conversion
The system cannot accept additional updates unless all previous updates have been successfully converted into the
SENC. Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the failed previous update from the original
media (in this example the failed previous update is GB5X01SW.002). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD
ROM from your chart supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.003, edt:
MISSING
1, upd:
Failed conversion. The base cell has failed in its SENC conversion
The system cannot accept updates unless the base cell has been successfully converted into the SENC. Chart is not
usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload the base cell from the original media (in this example the failed base
cell is GB5X01SW.000). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.001, edt:
OR Update MISSING
7-18
1, upd:
7. Vector Charts
7.3.6
Normally automatic SENC conversion is chosen and there is no need to initiate SENC conversions from the SENC
convert window. If you do not use the automatic SENC conversion, you need to manually initiate SENC conversion.
Another case in which you need to manually initiate SENC conversion is if you upgraded or reloaded the chart radar
software from the chart radar software CD ROM.
To initiate SENC conversions manually, do the following:
1. Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2. Choose SENC Convert from the menu then push the scrollwheel. The SENC Convert window appears.
3. Use the Cells button to choose an individual chart or use the Groups button to choose a group of charts.
4. Click the Convert button to initiate the SENC conversion of the charts.
Note that Convert only converts those charts that are not currently converted into the SENC format. If your
chosen chart or all members of your chosen group are already in the SENC format, the Conversion list remains
empty. If all or some charts are not yet in the SENC format, they are added to the Conversion list (see the
example below). If, for some reason, you need to force SENC conversion of an already converted chart, refer to
section 7.14 Other Features of Vector Charts.
Note 1: You can remove charts from the conversion list at any time. Use the cursor to highlight the charts to
remove then click the Select button. Finally, click the Cancel Conv. button to remove chosen charts from the
SENC conversion queue.
Note 2: You can view the results of the finished SENC conversions at any time. Click the Conv. History button to
view the conversion log.
7-19
7. Vector Charts
7.4
7.4.1
The Chart menu provides various features for processing charts. To display the menu, spin the scrollwheel to display
Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
Load and Update Charts: You can load ENCs into your hard disk, using CD
ROMs, floppies, USB memories or LAN (Local Area Network). For further details
see section 7.2 How to Load S57 Charts.
SENC Convert: You can convert ENCs (base cells and/or updates) into the SENC
format by individual cell or by groups of cells. For further details, see section 7.3.6
How to use the SENC CONVERT window to initiate SENC conversion.
Remove Charts: You can remove cells from your hard disk. See section 7.4.5 How
to remove an S57 chart cell from the system.
Chart Catalogue: You can manage S57 charts. See section 7.4.2 Catalogue of S57
cells.
Set Chart viewing dates: You can view date dependency of the cells (RENC status
query date, number of updates available, update display dates, update approve dates
of the cells) in the SENC format. For more information, see section 7.11 Chart
Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart.
Chart Permits: You can load permits for encrypted charts to enable their use in
your chart radar. Currently PRIMAR uses encryption.
ECDIS Chart 1: This is used to open the chart set "IHO ECDIS Chart 1". This
function helps you familiarize yourself with the various chart symbologies used with
the chart radar. For detailed information, see section 7.12 Symbology Used in
Vector Charts.
Open Chart by Cell name: You can open a S57 chart by its number. See section
7.9.2 How to select a chart by its name.
Chart Cell Status: You can view status of the cells (edition number and date, number of updates of the cell) stored
in your hard disk, CD ROMs or RENC. You can compare that you have the latest cell with latest update in use. For
further details, see section 7.14 Other Features of Vector Charts.
Manual Updates: You can update your charts manually. For the procedure, see Chapter 8 Manual Updates.
System: System contains a set of additional selections, and they are
described below.
Log File: The log file contains various system events that might be useful when your system supplier tries to find
the reason for unexpected behavior of the system reported by you.
User Permit: You can check your user permit, which is used as your
identifier in security systems such as PRIMAR and CMAP. See the
example at right.
Refresh Chart After Backup: This is used to refresh available charts and updates after someone backs up all charts
and updates from another chart radar to this chart radar.
7-20
7. Vector Charts
S57_Error
Cannot find Reset file
S52 Presentation Library: You can confirm the S52 presentation library
revision number for S57 charts. The current official Presentation library is
shown in this example.
Restart drawing process: This is used to restart chart drawing. Use restart drawing process, if you are not able to
move chart or zoom in/out.
7.4.2
An S57 catalogue is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your hard disk, available in a named
"CD ROM" or available from an RENC. Available charts are displayed using their limits of charts. Note that
sometimes the real coverage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it. You can cursorpick any chart by going over its limit then you can view the information for it.
To display the catalogue, do the following:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose Chart Catalogue then push the scrollwheel.
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.
2.
3.
4.
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
1.453 NM
352.0
5.
7-21
7. Vector Charts
The chart is available for use in SENC format. If the source of the chart is an RENC then the chart is
also up-to-date. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC, then all loaded updates are
included into the SENC.
Orange
The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been
cancelled. Either the SENC is from a former edition, the SENC is missing the latest updates or the
chart has been cancelled.
Red
If the chart is permit free, you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use
the chart currently.
The chart requires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart therefore you cannot use the
chart currently.
Blue
The chart is available either in ENC format, in SENC format for another software version or in SENC
format for another chart radar. For example, the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you
loaded a chart into the chart radar and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format.
Magenta
You have a permit to use the chart, but there is neither ENC nor SENC available on ECDIS, therefore
you cannot use the chart currently.
7-22
7. Vector Charts
7.4.3
You can define groups of S57 charts. This means you can collect related charts, for example, all cells that cover a
route from Liverpool to New York or all cells available from a National Hydrographic Office. This makes it easier
to perform many SENC maintenance functions such as loading base cells and updates, setting Display Until and
Approve Until dates, etc. Below is the procedure for how to make a group and add charts into it.
When you load or update S57 charts from CD-ROM, you are able to define a group in "Load or Update Charts from
loaded CD-ROM" window. To do this, proceed as follows:
6003.400'N
02458.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM
352.0
4.
7-23
7. Vector Charts
5.
+ 6002403.400'N
58.372'E
6.
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM
NM
352.0
Use the trackball to define a frame then the push the left button.
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
+ 6002403.400'N
58.372'E
7-24
1.453 NM
NM
352.0
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
7. Vector Charts
7.
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
8.
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM NM
352.0
When
p you
North Up
TM have completed entering frames, click the Close Edit button.
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
181.5
13.1 Kt
0.2 Kt
181.5
13.1 Kt
7-25
7. Vector Charts
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM
352.0
10. Click the Load button to load charts members of group, Japan, for example.
+ 6002403.400'N
58.372'E
2.
Click the Edit Group button then click the New button.
7-26
1.453 NM
352.0
NM
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
7. Vector Charts
3.
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NMNM
352.0
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NMNM
352.0
7-27
7. Vector Charts
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM NM
352.0
2.
3.
Use the Remove frame button to define area for charts or pick charts individually from the list.
HDG
SPD
SB
COG
SOG
(CALC)
(POSN)
(POSN)
(POSN)
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
7-28
1.453 NM NM
352.0
7. Vector Charts
HDG
SPD
SB
COG
SOG
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
(CALC)
(POSN)
(POSN)
(POSN)
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NMNM
352.0
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
CD
RENC
SENC
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
C-Map
1. Choose group.
2. Click Remove Frame
button to delete.
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
1.453 NM
352.0
2.
Check Groups.
3.
7-29
7. Vector Charts
CD
RENC
(CALC)
(POSN)
(POSN)
(POSN)
SENC
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
C-Map
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
7.4.4
1.453 NMNM
352.0
How to view status and setting viewing dates of S57 chart cells and
their updates
When you load S57 chart cell(s) and/or their updates, the system sets Display Until of S57 chart cell(s) as current
date of the system. To set Approve Until as current date of the system, you must open the Set Chart viewing dates
dialog box and perform Approve Until. You can view status and set viewing dates of S57 chart cells and their
updates. To view status and date dependency, do the following:
Choose Set Chart viewing dates from the Chart menu. The Chart Viewing date dialog box appears.
7-30
7. Vector Charts
SENC edt / upd: The column "SENC" contain edition/update status from "SENC", i.e., loaded and converted in the
chart radar.
Updates displ. until: "date until updates" is displayed. You can enter desired date by using the Display Until field.
The number after the date shows the number of updates for the displayed cell (number of displayed updates /
number of updates in SENC format).
Updates approv. until: View the Date Until updates is approved. You can enter desired date by using the Approve
Until field (number of approved updates / number of updates in SENC format).
The issue date of the Product List used is displayed as "Latest RENC Product List". An RENC Product List contains
information about the charts stored in RENC and the date when the Product List was issued. If the chart radar does
not contain any Product List, then the date of the Product List is displayed as "NVLD".
The ">>>" mark is used to indicate that a chart is not up-to-date. The "<<<" mark is used to indicate that SENC
contains newer information than the information in an RENC Product List. (You can need to load newer RENC
Product List.) Cancelled charts are indicated as "cancelled" instead of "edtn/updn". If an SENC contains a cancelled
chart, then the indication ">>>" is replaced with "XXX".
7.4.5
To remove an S57 format vector chart cell from the system, do the following:
1.
2.
Choose chart cells to remove from the system. You can remove base cell (000), updates (001) and SENC
format (snc).
3.
4.
7-31
7. Vector Charts
7.5
7.5.1
Introduction
Before you can use an RENC service, you have to be authorized as a customer of an RENC. To be authorized you
have to contact an official distributor (chart agent) of RENC. Then, the following services are available:
7.5.2
Permits
Permits are used to control the permission to use a chart. A permit in RENC security is connected to an edition.
Permits are issued as two different types:
Subscription permit. These include updates for subsequent 12 months. It is assumed that a typical user is a
SOLAS class ship, which is required to use up-to-date charts.
One-Off permit. These include only updates up to the issue date of the permit. It is assumed that a typical
user is a non-SOLAS class ship, which is not required to use up-to-date charts.
Each permit also includes the expiry date. The expiry date of a permit controls the ENC to SENC conversion. If the
issue date of a chart or update is older or equal to the permit expiry date, then the system can convert an ENC into
the SENC. There are no viewing time limits as used in some other security systems. The user has a right to view a
chart forever and moreover he has a right to convert a chart from its ENC format into the SENC forever.
An RENC can issue permits in two formats:
"*.pmt" format. This format does not include the applicable chart edition nor does it include applicable
permit type.
PERMIT.TXT format. This format includes the applicable chart edition as well as applicable permit type.
Both permit formats are fully operational, but the older "*.pmt" format creates confusion because it cannot support
the user when chart edition changes.
The system display warnings associated with expiry date. Examples are "will expire" warning 30 days before the
expiry date and "have expired" after the expiry date. These warnings are relevant only for Subscription permits.
Only the new PERMIT.TXT format supports the system to suppress irrelevant warnings associated with expiry date.
7.5.3
Product list
A Product List is maintained by an RENC. You can retrieve the Product List from an RENC via telecommunications
or you can load it from the CD ROM of an RENC. This list contains an up-to-date list of available charts and their
edition/update status in an RENC. When you load a CD ROM or use telecommunications to receive a Product List
from an RENC, the chart radar checks the issue date of the Product List. If the issue date indicates a newer Product
List, then it is copied into the chart radar. If the issue date indicates an older Product List, then chart radar shows a
notice to the user that newer Product List is already loaded.
7.5.4
Authentication
Normally the authentication process is invisible to the user. Only if the authentication fails, then the user gets an
appropriate notice. From a user point of view, the authentication is similar to the CRC checksum test. If the CRC
checksum test or authentication fails, then the chart is unusable.
Authentication uses a private key and a public key. A digital signature associated with each chart contains a private
key. A public key is stored in the chart radar and it is truly public. RENC may publish a new public key. This public
key will be available as text by fax, by post, by front page of a newspaper, etc. and as a text file, for example,
PRIMAR.PUB.
7-32
7. Vector Charts
7.5.5
CD ROM service
If you are using a CD ROM service, you receive the following from an RENC:
Base CD ROM contains all base cells that are available in an RENC CD ROM database when the CD ROM was
released.
Update CD ROM contains all updates to the Base CD ROM, but it will also contain any new base cells and new
edition and re-issues received from the contributing Hydrographic Offices. Update CD ROM will be issued once
a week.
If you want to enlarge your chart coverage, you have to contact your distributor to order more permits for new
charts.
Subscription types
Charts and their updates stored in RENC are decrypted and you have to get a key (permit) to load charts into the
chart radar. There are two different kinds of permits: subscription and one-off.
Subscription
Subscription period is 12 months and it starts when you order first permit(s) from an RENC.
User subscribes to an updating service
Updating service has a renewable expiration date
ENC is still available after expiration, but cannot apply any new information
User will receive the following during the service period:
All updates issued to the ENC
Any re-issues for the ENC
Any new edition of the ENC
If you enlarge your chart coverage during your subscription period as shown above, the date of subscription
expiration for all charts will be the same date.
One-Off
In the one-off permit, you order permit for chart and updates that are valid until date you order permit (i.e., chart is
up-to-date when you ordered it). No more information can be retrieved for this chart, which is published after order
date.
One-Off Current Edition: Permit for a chart that is based on data on the hard disk of the chart radar.
One-Off Latest Edition: Permit for a chart that is the latest available based on the Product List of an RENC.
7-33
7. Vector Charts
7.6
7.6.1
To view the Product List in graphical presentation, use the catalogue, which you can display by opening the Chart
menu and choosing Chart Catalogue. The catalogue of S57 charts shows the situation when you last ordered the
Product List from an RENC or loaded the latest Base or Update CD ROM into the chart radar.
Note: The chart radar automatically keeps the latest available Product List. Thus the chart radar does not load the
Product List if it is older than the one already loaded into the chart radar.
p
y
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
CD
RENC
SENC
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1. Select RENC.
C-Map
2. Select desired
filters.
+ 6002403.400'N
58.372'E
1.453 NM
352.0
The chart is available for use in SENC format. If the source of the chart is an RENC, then the chart is
also up-to-date. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC then all loaded updates are
included into the SENC.
Orange
The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been
cancelled. Either the SENC is from a previous edition, the latest SENC update was missed or the chart
has been cancelled.
Red
If the chart is permit free, you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use
the chart currently.
If the chart requires a permit and you do not have the permit for the chart, you cannot use the chart
currently.
Blue
The chart is available either in ENC format, in SENC format for another software version or in SENC
format for another chart radar. For example the chart is blue during SENC conversion and if you
loaded a chart into the chart radar and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format.
Magenta
You have a permit to use the chart, but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot
use the chart currently.
7-34
7. Vector Charts
7.6.2
To keep charts up-to-date, you should check for updates with an RENC weekly. The chart radar compares charts
used to Product List of an RENC. If a Permanent message appears on the chart display of chart radar (at the upper
left corner), this means that the charts used were checked against the Product List and at least one of the charts used
is not up-to-date. See the Permanent message below.
Permanent message
The information of available charts and their up-to-date status is available both in the catalogue and in the Chart
viewing dates window.
The easiest method to check if charts are up-to-date is to view the catalogue and check that the names of all
required charts appear in green. The names of charts that are not up-to-date appear in orange. For further
details see section 7.6.1 How to view the coverage of an RENC service.
You can also use the Chart viewing dates window in the Chart menu when you have doubt that some charts are not
up-to-date or the Permanent message shown above is displayed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7-35
7. Vector Charts
7.6.3
The chart radar periodically checks for the last time you ordered the Product List from an RENC. If the Product List
is more than 30 days old, the chart radar displays the S57 Message shown below:
To check the date when you last ordered the Product List of an RENC CD ROM, choose Set Chart viewing dates
from the Chart menu. The date the Product List was last ordered is shown at the lower left corner of the Chart
viewing dates window.
7-36
7. Vector Charts
7.6.4
Permits are used to control the right to use a chart in the chart radar. A permit in an RENC ENC service is connected
to an edition of a chart. Permits are issued in different types:
Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 12 months.
One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of the permit.
The expiry date of a permit controls the loading of base charts and their updates to the chart radar. The chart radar
will warn you when you are loading charts or updates that are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a
permit. If a permit has expired, it is impossible to load a chart or its update that was issued after the expiration date
of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, but it will not complete the requirements for having up-todate charts. To view the Chart Permits window, open the Chart menu and choose Chart Permits.
1.
2.
3.
.
4.
5.
6.
Description of the chart permits window
1. Public Key lets you view a public key or load a new one.
2. Load File enables downloading from an RENC when you receive permits from that RENC.
3. Backup makes a back-up copy of permits.
4. The Edt (Edition) field displays edition number of a chart to which the permit is valid. Note that when a new
edition of a chart is issued a new permit is required. It is possible to have permits for different editions of the
same chart.
5. The Type field shows type of permit held for a chart: S, Subscription or O, One-off.
6. The Expires field shows the expiration date of permits. All subscription-type permits will expire on the same
date.
7-37
7. Vector Charts
Subscription warnings
If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn you about the expiration date
of your subscription license.
Warning about soon-to-be-expired
subscription is activated every 12
hours when it is less than 30 days
from the expiration date.
7.6.5
To view a public key or to load a public key into the chart radar, choose Chart Permits from the Chart menu then
click the Public Key button.
The View Current button displays current public key. The Load New button loads a new public key from *.PUB
file (for example, PRIMAR.PUB) and displays that files contents.
7-38
7. Vector Charts
Compare the content of the newly loaded public key with the known content of the public key of an RENC you use.
If the contents are the same, you can accept the newly loaded public key by clicking the Accept New button.
7.7
7.7.1
Make a Subscription /
End User Agreement with
your chart distributor.
Load Base
CD ROM into ECDIS.
Load Update
CD ROM into ECDIS.
7-39
7. Vector Charts
7.7.2
Subscription type:
Subscription
Subscription type:
One-Off
Nothing is received
automatically.
7-40
7. Vector Charts
7.7.3
A Base CD ROM from an RENC contains all the charts stored in an RENC when the CD ROM was issued. When
you load charts (using the CD ROM catalogue) the following information is also loaded into the chart radar's hard
disk:
The Content Summary of the Base CD ROM
Publisher Notes
Product List
7-41
7. Vector Charts
When you receive a new Base CD ROM from an RENC, load charts into the chart radar as follows. Note that it is
very typical that the Product List of a base CD ROM is older than the Product List in use.
1.
Check that you have already loaded correct Public key. This is very important if you receive CD ROMs for
multiple RENC. For details, see section 7.6.5 How to manage public key from an RENC.
2.
3.
Choose Load and Update Charts from the Chart menu and "from CD ROM" from the sub menu. If the
following window appears, you have to define location of CD ROM then click the Load button. If you want
to load from another chart radar via LAN, you have to change Load Dir. Click the Browse button to select a
new Load Dir.
4. When you click the Load button, the chart radar loads Content Summary, Publisher Notes and Product List
from the CD ROM and opens the Load and Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box.
5.
The system automatically copies all text and pictures files associated with charts on the CD ROM catalogue,
keeping only the latest version of these. If your system is already using the latest text and picture files you
will get the notice below.
7-42
7. Vector Charts
6. In the Load or Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box, choose the charts to load into chart radar then click the
Load
y
North
Up TMbutton to load.
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
6003.400'N
+ 024
58.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM
352.0
7. Before loading begins (then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked confirmation for
this operation.
7-43
7. Vector Charts
9. If error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC, the following window appears.
7-44
7. Vector Charts
7.7.5
Insert desired CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive. Select from Chart menu Load or Update Charts and next menu
select from CD-ROM.
North Up TM
ECDIS only
HDG
SPD (CALC)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
+ 0246003.400'N
58.372'E
070.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
1.453 NM
352.0
Sample coverage area when a CD-ROM catalogue is from a Base CD-ROM from an RENC
Note: remove selection "Missing only" to see total content of CD-ROM.
7-45
7. Vector Charts
7.7.6
An RENC can deliver permits in a CD ROM, floppy disk or a USB memory. When you receive new permits from
an RENC, you have to load them into the chart radar. If the processor unit has no floppy disk drive, copy the permit
from the floppy disk to a USB memory. A permit is a key that is used to decrypt the chart you want to use in the
chart radar. To load permits, do the following:
1.
.
2.
3.
7-46
7. Vector Charts
If you load permits from a different chart radar, you get the
following message:
7-47
7. Vector Charts
7.8
7.8.1
When loading S57 charts into the chart radar, messages appear to alert you to permits and authentication. These are
described below and on the next several pages.
7.8.2
7-48
7. Vector Charts
Typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as new
edition instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.
The common reason for this message is that the chart has been updated too
many times as new edition instead of update. Ask for new permits from
your chart agent.
7-49
7. Vector Charts
7.8.3
7-50
A typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as a new
edition instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.
7. Vector Charts
7.9
7.9.1
2.
From the Chart Catalogue dialog box, use the cursor to choose desired chart. For further details, see section
7.4.2 Catalogue of S57 cells.
3.
To restore own ships position to the screen center, display TM/CU Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions
area and then push the left mouse button.
Range - and Range+ change the chart scale. If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the
relative position of your ship with respect to the display. If true motion reset is on, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep
the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display.
The system automatically chooses next larger or smaller scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale is available at
your current viewing position, the message "Larger Scale Data Exists" appears.
7-51
7. Vector Charts
7.9.2
To activate a specific S57 chart cell onto the display, use Open Chart by Cell name menu in the Chart menu as
follows:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the right button.
2.
Choose Open Chart by Cell name from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Choose desired chart from the chart list dialog box then click the Open Chart button.
7.9.3
The Chart Display dialog box contains several pages of chart features that you may adjust as appropriate. To display
this dialog box, spin the scrollwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and
then push the left mouse button.
How to set value for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour
You can set values for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour. This can be done on
Chart page of the Chart Display dialog box. Colours used for depth presentation on the electronic chart are
controlled by setting values for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour. Soundings on
the electronic chart, which are equal to or less than the value of Safety Depth, are highlighted. See below pictures
for multi-colour presentation and two-colour presentation. Selection of multi- and two-colour presentations can be
done by selecting from list box of "Depths" on Chart page of Chart Display.
MULTI-COLOUR presentation
Chart zero
Shallow contour
Soundings within this
range are highlighted.
Safety
depth
Soundings within this
range are not highlighted.
Deep contour
Non-navigable area
Navigable area
In the multi-colour presentation four colours are used for depths. If input Safety contour does not exist in electronic
chart, system selects automatically next available deeper depth contour as Safety contour. For example input value is
8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in electronic chart, the system automatically selects next available deeper
depth contour (10 m) as Safety contour. Depth contour value of 10 m is presented as Safety Contour in this
electronic chart.
Shallow contour is for possible visual color change inside the unsafe water area. Unsafe water area is all shallower
than "safety contour". Set value of Shallow Contour less than value of Safety contour. For more information about
color change, see below selection of "Depths".
7-52
7. Vector Charts
TWO-COLOUR presentation:
Chart zero
Shallow contour
Safety
depth
Soundings within this
range are not highlighted.
Deep contour
Non-navigable area
Navigable area
In the two-colour presentation unsafe water is shown as blue colour and safe water shown as white colour. The
safety contour is used to qualify unsafe water (depth shallower than safety contour) and safe water (depths deeper
than safety contour).
If input Safety contour does not exist in electronic chart, system selects automatically next deeper available depth
contour as Safety contour. For example input value is 8 m, but there is no 8 m depth contour in electronic chart,
system selects next deeper depth contour (10 m) as Safety contour. Depth contour value of 10 m is presented as
Safety Contour in this electronic chart.
Anti-grounding function
The figure displays the different water depth limits for the navigation by ENC in ECDIS. The ship's
navigator can individually adjust the warning time before reaching such limit line.
The following settings are possible:
Safety depth: A defined water depth, e.g. the draught and underkeel clearance, which are used by
ECDIS to display water-depths, which are equal or lower as the depth defined.
Safety contour: A defined water-depth area, which is used by ECDIS to differentiate between safe and
unsafe water-depth and to generate an anti-grounding alarm before the ship is passing the line.
If the ENC data do not provide the chosen depth-lines, the system automatically uses the next deeper
available depth-line as reference.
Chart zero (0 m)
Shallow water (5 m)
Ships safety depth (10 m)
Obstruction of depth less than the safety contour
which lies within the safe water area (15 m)
0
5
10
16
30
7-53
7. Vector Charts
Chart page
Black and grey color symbol:
This symbol is used to verify that you can distinguish black (frame of symbol) and
grey (inner part of symbol) colors with current contrast and brilliance settings.
DISP dimmer: Use this control to adjust dimming of display. Text "CALIB"
indicates that dimming of display is set within calibration values.
Palette: Choose appropriate palette for the display depending on the brightness of
the bridge.
Shallow contour: Set value of shallow water contour. For more information, see the
section How to set value for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and
Deep Contour on the preceding page.
Safety depth: Set value of safety depth. Spot soundings below the safety depth are
highlighted.
Safety contour: Set value of safety contour. Visible safety contour is equal to set
value or if the contour of set value is not available then the visible safety contour is
next deeper contour than safety contour. For more information, see the section How
to set value for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour
on the preceding page.
Note: The system uses safety contour also for chart alerts.
Deep contour: Set deep water contour. For more information, see the section How
to set value for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour
on the preceding page.
TM reset: In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset borderline (set here), and
then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage).
Appears in the ECDIS mode only.
Chart alert highlight: Set chart alert highlight. For more information, see section 9.1.3 How to highlight chart alert
areas.
Symbols: Select how to display chart symbols. The options are:
Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color.
Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts.
Depths: Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display. For more information, see the section How to
set value for Shallow Contour, Safety Depth, Safety Contour and Deep Contour on the preceding page.
For MULTI COLOUR, the chart display uses four different colors for contours:
Deeper than user-chosen deep contour
Between deep contour and user-chosen safety contour
Between safety contour and user-chosen shallow water contour
Between shallow water contour and coastline.
For TWO COLOUR, the chart display uses only two colors:
Deeper than safety contour
Boundaries: Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are:
Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines.
SYMB.: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line.
7-54
7. Vector Charts
Note 1: To use the Info request feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen chart feature, the associated
chart feature must be turned on from the Standard page.
Note 2: To navigate between the pages in the Chart Display dialog box, click the appropriate arrow tab with the left
mouse button or hit the NEXT key on the Control Head RCU-018.
7-55
7. Vector Charts
7.9.4
Display base
A subset of chart features is called the Display Base. As required by IMO, these features cannot be made invisible.
The Display Base consist of the following chart features:
Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour that lie within the safe waters
defined by the safety contour
Indication of isolated dangers that lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges,
overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation.
7.9.5
Visibility control of the navigation features is divided into five pages in the Symbol Display dialog box. The
"Route" page controls planned and monitored route. The "Tracking" page controls past tracks and some other
features. The "Mariner" page controls Notes and user charts. The "Targets" page controls TT and AIS targets. The
"General" page controls own ship and target related things.
The user can define settings for chart details that are displayed over the chart area.
Route page
This page contains selection of route related navigation features
Monitored route: Choose which part of monitored route to display.
Planned route: Choose which part of planned route to display.
Note: WPT mark on both monitor and planned routes is set permanently to Std position.
Open Main menu and select Symbol Display from the menu.
7-56
7. Vector Charts
Tracking page
Own ship past tracks
tSystem: Check to plot own ships tracks using system-fed position.
Primary: Check to plot own ships past track with position fed from the primary
sensor.
Secondary: Check to plot own ships past track with position fed from a secondary
sensor.
Style: Select time stamp position for past track (indicated by Tick or Point)
Length: Select length of past track
Labels: Select label interval.
Target past positions
Density: Select density of past position of points.
Style: Select style of presentation of target's past position.
Events: These marks are based on voyage log records.
User Event: Display event symbols on ECDIS, where the system has recorded an
event based on conditions you have set (Type: User and Auto).
Auto Event: Display automatically entered event symbols, where the system has
recorded an event based on conditions you have set (Type: Ship and Alarm).
Positions: Display the latitude and longitude of an event.
Note 1: MOB event is visible always.
Note 2: You can choose period of time to display event marks in the list box
"Show".
Targets page
Color: Select color of target from the list box
TT: Std or small for TTs.
AIS: ROT (/min), limit to display AIS target with curved speed vector. Note,
source of ROT must be ROT gyro on target vessel.
Association conditions: Set appropriate conditions for TT and AIS association for:
Gap
RNG Diff
BRG Diff
SPD Diff
CRS Diff
7-57
7. Vector Charts
Mariner page
Notes
Position: Check to show positions of Notes records with symbols on the chart.
Range: Check to circumscribe pilot data records with circles on the display.
The size of a circle depends on the value set in Notes.
Text: Check to show text of Notes records on the chart.
User chart
Points: Check to show user points on user charts.
Lines: Check to show lines on user charts.
Symbols, Tidals: Check to show symbols and tidals on user charts.
Areas: Check to show areas on the display. Color fill for the areas can be
chosen as transparent from 25 to 75% and as No color fill. If No color fill is
chosen, only the boundaries of the areas are visible.
Only radar part of Symbols, Lines and Areas: Check to display only those
Lines, Symbols and Areas that have user selection "on radar" activated for
them in the user chart. This is used to view only that part of the user chart that
will be sent to the radar connected to the system.
Manual Updates
Select to show manual updates with orange symbols.
Note: Visibility of manual updates made as true symbols are controlled
through Standard and Other pages of the Chart Display menu.
General page
Ship Outlines
Ship outlines: Select OFF or ON to show minimized or scaled symbol,
respectively.
True outline shown if:
(Beam width>6mm / Length>6mm), you can set whether width or length is
used to set limit for displaying true symbol.
AIS outlines: Select OFF or ON to show AIS targets in same size or scaled
symbol, respectively.
Velocity Vectors
Style: Select vector style, Conventional (simplified symbol), Std ECDIS
(minimized symbol).
Time Increments: Check to show ticks of velocity vector.
Note: This controls both own ship and targets ticks. If ticks are too tightly
spaced, they will be automatically removed from the display, until spacing
between ticks is sufficient to distinguish them separately. This depends on
display scale and speed of vessel/target.
Radar Antenna
Check to mark position of radar antenna (with "x".
7-58
7. Vector Charts
7.9.6
How to store and recall chart display setting for visible chart
and navigational features
Chart display settings and Symbol display settings are using common settings, which means that when you select
settings display settings the same file is chosen for symbol settings.
You can define chart display and symbol display settings that are displayed over S57 charts cells. You can save
these chart display settings to your hard disk and recall them whenever you need them.
Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button.
2.
Put the cursor on the small triangle on the Chart Display or Symbol Display dialog box.
3.
Choose "Save as" from the Chart Display or Symbol Display menu and then push the scrollwheel.
4.
Enter desired name for Chart Display Settings and press OK in the dialog box.
5.
Make your changes both Chart Display and Symbol display settings. Note, that you have to select "Save" from
the menu before closing the dialog box.
Open the Chart Display or Symbol Display dialog box and put the cursor on the triangle.
2.
3.
Open the Chart Display or Symbol Display dialog box and put the cursor on the triangle.
2.
Choose Save from the menu to save current chart display settings.
7-59
7. Vector Charts
7.9.7
There are three sets of predefined Chart Display Settings that can be used to display Charts with certain chart
features. The predefined Chart Display Settings are called as:
IMO-Base
IMO Primary (Only in Chart Radar mode)
IMO-Standard
IMO-All Other
You can find display setting in use on upper status bar. For more information, see section 6.1 ECDIS Overview.
To select desired IMO Chart Display Settings, proceed as follows:
*
*
*
*
* Appears when user-created file is selected.
7-60
1.
Open CHART DISPLAY window and move cursor over black triangle on Chart
Display window, press left mouse button.
2.
Choose Set IMO Base, Set Imo Standard or Set IMO All Other from the menu.
7. Vector Charts
7.10
Vector charts contain sailing directions, tidal tables and other textual and picture information that are not
immediately visible on the chart. This information forms an integral part of the legal ENC chart that can fulfil
SOLAS requirements. As a navigator you should check them as well as you check the visible chart when you do
your planning and when you perform navigation.
Because these features are not permanently visible on the chart as they used to be in case of a paper chart, the chart
radar has special symbols to highlight the locations from which you can use the Info request to know additional
information about the above-mentioned features. Below are examples of these symbols. For further details, see
section 7.13 How to Request Information About Vector Chart Objects.
A grey box is used to show that Tidal information is available for Info request by cursor pick.
Note: The visibility of the grey box symbol is controlled by the item "Depth contours, magnetics,
currents" in the Other 1 page of the Chart Display dialog box.
A magenta-colored symbol is used to show that additional textual or picture information such as
sailing directions are available from Info request by cursor pick.
Note: The visibility of the magenta symbol is controlled by the item "Additional information
available" in the Other 1 page of the Chart Display dialog box.
7-61
7. Vector Charts
7.11
7.11.1
Introduction
Vector charts contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues, new editions and updates,
creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date dependency, some features of the S57 charts create
additional date dependency. These features include "Date Start", "Date End", "Seasonal date start" and "Seasonal
date end". Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners, as
their paper chart equivalent updates are called. For further details see section 7.11.5 About chart viewing date
dependency of S57 standard.
You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency to use the valid data for any given date applicable for your
navigation or planning purposes. For example, you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before
they became valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart up-to-date and valid
for your intended use. Normally you should set Display Until and Approve Until once per week to keep your chart
up-to-date.
Note: When you load charts and their updates into your system, the Display Until date is set as current date of the
system. You must set the Approve Until date yourself. Make sure that you have set Display Until and Approve Until
dates to the current date or to your planning date, whichever is applicable to your current usage of charts. For details
on how to set Display/Approve date, see section 7.11.2 How to approve and highlight vector chart updates. If the
charts you are currently using have Display Until and/or Approved Until set more than 1 week from current system
date, you will you get the Permanent message on your chart display.
Permanent message
7.11.2
Before you approve updates, you can display (highlight) updates that are included into S57 charts. Normally you
have chosen "Automatic Display Until" after the SENC conversion. In this case, after all the SENC conversions
have been finished, all updates are automatically highlighted and you can view and approve them after viewing. For
further details, see section 7.11.4 How to set "approve until" date.
If you want to review updates after the initial approval of the updates do the following:
1.
2.
Use Display Until to set the end date for the update
highlight. See section 7.11.3 How to set "display
until" date.
3.
4.
7-62
7. Vector Charts
7.11.3
1.
2.
3.
7.11.4
1.
2.
3.
7-63
7. Vector Charts
7.11.5
How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes
Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date.
The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Display/Approve date settings by
user. Actions 1 to 4 areas as follows:
1.
Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display date is set as current date of the system.
Approve date has to be set to current date.
2.
The date in which update 1 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see
the chart with update 1.
3.
The date in which update 2 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see
the chart with update 1 and update 2.
4.
The date in which update 3 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see
the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3.
Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If
your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage.
Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning, always use planned date of
each waypoint to check your plan.
How temporary and preliminary notices to mariners behave with vector charts
In some cases the producer of a chart (Hydrographic Office) is aware of changes that will happen in the future. A
Hydrographic Office is able to include this kind of update into the chart for later use. In the paper chart world, these
changes are published in Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners.
7-64
7. Vector Charts
7-65
7. Vector Charts
>>
>>
The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the full date for ending date
(YYYYMMDD).
>>
>>
7-66
7. Vector Charts
This example shows how a user can find, using the Info query (seasonal), the starting and ending month and day
in every year (-MMDD).
>>
>>
This example shows how a user can find, using the Info query (seasonal), the starting and ending month and day
in every year (-MM).
>>
>>
7-67
7. Vector Charts
The figure below shows the attributes of the caution area in the example above, in the Info request window.
>>
>>
7-68
7. Vector Charts
7.12
You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1, which is included in this
chart radar. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your selections. See section 7.9.3 How to control
visible chart features.
You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1, which is included in this
ECDIS. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your selections. See section 7.9.3 How to control visible
chart features.
1.
2.
Choose ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Choose desired chart symbols from the submenu to show on the ECDIS.
7.12.1
The chart radar uses the official IHO presentation library to draw vector charts. The presentation library is
replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personnel and type approval authorities.
When this manual was published the official presentation library was "pslb03_2.dai", known as "Official IHO
presentation library for chart radar Ed 3 revision 1, Edition: 3.2".
7-69
7. Vector Charts
7.13
The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an important function of the
chart radar. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the
interface panel all the information available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and
barely intelligible attribute information.
7.13.1
The request information about S57 chart objects is given only to objects that are chosen for display by the user. For
how choose chart details to display, see section 7.9.3 How to control visible chart features (chart display).
7.13.2
To specify desired SENC and object for information request, do the following:
1. Put the cursor on object desired.
2. Push the scrollwheel. Two windows appear: Objects by Cell and Object.
3. Use the Objects by Cell window to choose desired chart cell and desired object from which you need
information.
If there are different navigation purpose S57 charts over the area where you are making an information request,
you can choose desired S57 chart cell from the Cell window. A list of S57 chart cells is displayed in the Cell list
box. Choose desired S57 chart cell from the list.
ECDIS mode
4.
Choose desired object from the Objects in display priority order list box. Chosen object on the chart is shown
with mark showing information in the Object window.
7-70
7. Vector Charts
Detailed information for the chosen object appears in the Object window.
ECDIS mode
5. To close the windows, click the X on the window you wish to close.
7.13.3
After you have chosen a vector chart object, you can view detailed information about it in the Object window:
Object name and
validity period
Pictorial presentation
Additional coded text
information
Detailed properties of
the object
Position of the
object
ECDIS mode
7-71
7. Vector Charts
7.13.4
Note: If, in the chart radar mode, you click the View content button, neither text nor pictures are displayed and the
following message appears.
>>
>>
7-72
7. Vector Charts
>>
>>
7-73
7. Vector Charts
Linked objects
Often a group of chart objects are linked together. The most common example of this practice is a beacon or buoy,
in which the body and the top mark are defined separately. Another example is lights and recommended track. Still
another example is measurement mile. There are also other similar cases.
ECDIS mode
7-74
7. Vector Charts
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
7-75
7. Vector Charts
7-76
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
>>
7. Vector Charts
Measurement mile
>>
>>
>>
>>
tails
>>
>>
>>
>>
tails
7-77
7. Vector Charts
7.14
There are some functions or features that are not used on a daily or weekly basis, but sometimes there is a need to
use them.
7.14.1
Cell status
Use the Chart Cell Status function in the Chart Menu to find out the status of individual cells in your system, in a
CD ROM or in an RENC.
Status of CD ROM: This information is based on information in the CD ROM catalogue you have loaded and
chosen here from the CD ROM list box.
Status of RENC: This information is based on information in an RENC. One example of an RENC is PRIMAR.
You get the status of cells in an RENC via telecommunications, if you have optional telecommunication installed in
your system and you are a licensed user of an RENC.
Status of ENC: This information is based on information on the hard disk of the system. The ENC used here is
S57ed3 delivery formatted chart. Before it can be displayed as a chart it has to be converted into the systems
internal display format SENC.
Status of SENC: This information is based on information on the hard disk of the system. A SENC is the systems
internal display format.
Use the Conv Log button to view a detailed conversion log of S57 chart cell.
7.14.2
You can need to check when an update has been added into
your chart radar. Also you can need to check what was
shown in your chart display three weeks ago. There are
also many other cases where you need to find what was
known by your chart radar.
Cell:
Item:
Displayed Update
Approved Update
Latest Update
7-78
RENC
CD
HD
7. Vector Charts
7.14.3
The Cell Status window in the Chart menu can be used to force a new SENC conversion for any chart cell that is
already in the SENC format. Normally you do not need this feature, but it could be useful if, for example, you need
to analyze why an update cannot be converted, etc.
Open the Chart menu, choose Cell Status then click the
Create SENC button to initiate SENC conversion of
the base cell.
7-79
7. Vector Charts
7-80
8. Manual Updates
SOLAS require that mariners keep their charts up-to-date for an intended voyage. Mariners receive chart corrections
and other essential information for the area of their intended voyage as
Navtex warnings
Mariners should also keep the electronic charts in their chart radar up-to-date. Regardless of the chart material used,
mariner must know which of these chart corrections are applied into their chart radar charts and which of them
needs to be added as manual updates.
Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position or other characteristics of an
already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this chart radar, manual updates are stored in a common
database.
Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display. If a mariner needs to make
obsolete any of the official objects he deletes them. Then, in practice, the deleted features are still visible, but they
are displayed a certain way to indicate a deleted object.
8.1
8-1
8. Manual Updates
8.2
8.2.1
Visibility of the orange symbols from manual updates is controlled on the Mariner page of the Symbol Display
dialog box.
On the Mariner page the item Manual Updates is selected to "Std Orange".
For chart alerts calculation, the following orange symbols can be detected and highlighted during route planning and
route monitoring. The associated alert is "860 Safety contour".
Drawing type:
Point: Mariner Danger Highlight
Point: Mariner Foul Ground
Point: Mariner Isolated Danger
Point: Mariner Obstruction
Point: Mariner Under Water Rock
Point: Mariner Wreck
Line: Mariner Danger Highlight Line
Area: Mariner Danger Highlight Area
8.2.2
Chart features added by manual updates behave exactly as any other chart feature. Their visibility follows common
rules. For more information, see section 7.9.3 How to control visible chart features (chart display).
8-2
8. Manual Updates
8.3
8.3.1
Manual updates operate like any other S57 chart that contains updates and other set chart viewing dates features.
When you accept manual updates as permanent, the system sets Display Until of manual updates as current date of
the system. To set Approve Until as current date of the system, you must open the Set chart viewing dates window
(in the Chart menu) and perform Approve Until. For how to set current date, see section 7.11 Chart Viewing Dates
and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart. Recommended settings in the Chart viewing dates window are:
Sync Manual Update Dates
All SENCs
See the example below where Display until and Approve until are set as the system current date.
8-3
8. Manual Updates
8.4
8.4.1
The manual update editor operates in sessions. You create a session when you activate the Manual Update Planning
dialog box, displayed by choosing Manual Update from the Chart menu followed by Planning from the sub menu.
You can freely delete, modify, copy or create chart objects until you feel finished with your session. Then, you
terminate your session by clicking the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button then the chart radar stores
your manual updates permanently. If you need to leave your manual update session and discard all modifications
made during the current session, click X in upper right corner.
Note: The manual update editor is only available in the North Up or Course Up orientation mode.
New, Copy, Modify, Delete: These buttons are used to collect chart objects into a list shown in the Manual Update
Planning dialog box for further editing during current session of manual update planning. New creates an object
from scratch. Copy creates an object using an existing object as an example. Modify changes an existing object.
Delete removes an existing object.
Remove from List: If you made a manual update by mistake, you can remove it if you haven't accepted it yet as
permanent. You can remove it by choosing (highlighting) that chart object in the List then clicking the Remove
from List button.
Edit Properties: You can edit properties of a chosen (highlighted) chart object by using the Edit Properties button.
8-4
8. Manual Updates
8.4.2
The mariner can insert a new object either using New or Copy in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. With
New he creates a new feature from scratch. With Copy he uses an already existing object as an example for the
newly inserted feature.
5.
4.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
14.
8-5
8. Manual Updates
Cursor mode
Point:
Line:
Area:
11. If you would like to include textual information related to an orange symbol, click the Edit Properties and
values button.
12. Highlight Information in the right side box then click the << button to move it to the left hand box then highlight
it. Then, you can add textual information in the Property Value field. To enter text or numeric value, click inside
the box, spin the scrollwheel to choose character desired then push the scrollwheel. After entering all characters
desired, click the Accept List and Values button.
13. Click the Accept button.
14. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.
8-6
8. Manual Updates
3. Click desired
object with cursor
and push left
mouse button.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
9.
8. Set the positions
with cursor and
push left mouse
button. Then click
Accept.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2. Click the Copy button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
3. Put the cursor on the desired object and press left button.
4. Choose object from the Objects by Cell window. There can be more than one object in the area.
5. Click the Accept button.
6. New orange symbols are displayed in the list in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Then click the Edit
Properties button.
7. Click the Edit Position button.
8. Put the cursor on the desired location on the chart radar display. Push the left button then click the Accept
button.
Note: You must set the cursor mode correctly in to determine position. The cursor mode available depends on
drawing type.
Drawing type: Cursor mode
Point:
Set Fixed (Set Center)
Line:
Select Chain, Select Point, Insert Point, Append Point, Set Center
Area:
Select Chain, Select Point, Insert Point, Append Point, Set Center
9. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.
8-7
8. Manual Updates
8.4.3
The mariner cannot permanently remove any of the official chart objects from the chart display. If the mariner needs
to remove any of the official chart objects, he is allowed to mark them as deleted. In practice the deleted chart object
is still visible, but it has a special presentation for a deleted object on top of it. To delete a chart object, do the
following:
2.
4.
5.
6.
3. Place cursor on
desired object
and push left mouse
button.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-4 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2. Click the Delete button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
3. Put the cursor on the desired chart object then push the left button.
4. Choose the object from the Objects by Cell window that you wish to delete. You can also view data of each
object before making your selection.
5. Click the Accept button.
6. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to complete the deletion.
Note: If you deleted an official ENC chart object, a deletion mark is added over the original chart object that is still
visible. If you delete a manual update chart object, it is removed from the chart display based on date of deletion.
8-8
8. Manual Updates
8.4.4
3.
6.
4.
8-9
8. Manual Updates
The example below shows how to define an area for an existing chart feature.
1) Activate Position Edit.
2) Choose
"Set Center".
8-10
8. Manual Updates
8.5
.
The manual update editor has the choices shown below and you can choose one
by choosing Manual Updates from the Chart menu.
Planning: Operate with new manual updates.
Undo Last: Remove last accepted manual update planning session. By
repeating Undo Last you can remove any amount of old manual update planning
session.
Clear: Remove all manual updates in a single operation.
Backup and Restore: Make a backup or recall already recorded backup.
With an ARCS chart, you also have "Set chart viewing dates" to set viewing
date of manual updates. Note that with S57 charts "Set chart viewing dates" is in
the Chart menu.
8.5.1
The manual update editor operates in sessions. You create a session when you activate the Manual Update Planning
dialog box. You can freely delete, modify, copy or create chart objects until you feel finished with your session.
Then, you terminate your session by clicking the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button and the chart radar
stores your manual updates permanently. If you need to leave your manual update session and discard all
modifications made during the current session, click X in upper right corner.
Note: The manual update editor is only available in the North Up or Course Up orientation mode.
New, Copy, Modify, Delete: These buttons are used to collect chart objects into a list shown in a Manual Update
Planning dialog box for further editing during current session of manual update planning. New creates an object
from scratch. Copy creates an object using an existing object as an example. Modify changes an existing object.
Delete removes an existing object.
Remove from List: If you made a manual update by mistake, you can remove it if you haven't accepted it yet as
permanent. You can remove it by choosing (highlighting) chart object in the List then clicking the Remove from
List button.
Edit Properties: You can edit properties of chosen (highlighted) chart object by using the Edit Properties button.
8-11
8. Manual Updates
8.5.2
The mariner can insert a new object either using New or Copy. With New he creates a new feature from scratch.
With Copy he uses an already existing object as an example for the new inserted feature.
8-12
8. Manual Updates
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.
6.
9.
8. Set position with
cursor and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept button.
8-13
8. Manual Updates
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
9.
8-14
7.
8. Manual Updates
5.
4.
6.
7.
8.
11.
12.
13.
8-15
8. Manual Updates
3. Click desired 4.
object with
cursor and
push left
mouse button.
2.
5.
6.
7.
9.
8. Set position with
cursor and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept
button.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-4 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2. Click the Copy button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
3. Put the cursor on a desired object then push the left button.
4. Choose object from the Object by Cell window.
5. Click the Accept button.
6. New object is displayed in "List of". Then, click the Edit Properties button.
7. Click the Edit Position button.
8. Put the cursor on desired location on the chart radar display. Push the left button then click the Accept button.
9. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. (If button is hidden by window, move the window.)
8-16
8. Manual Updates
8.5.3
The mariner cannot permanently remove from the chart display any of the official chart objects, but he can modify
position and/or properties of chart objects. When the mariner modifies a chart object, the chart radar will mark
original chart object as deleted and a copy of original chart object as inserted.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-4 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2. Click the Modify button.
3. Put the cursor on the desired object then push the left button.
4. Choose the object from the Objects by Cell window. Confirm data for selected object.
5. Click the Accept button.
6. Click the Edit Properties button.
7. If you want to modify the position of the object, click the Edit Position button. Otherwise continue from step 13.
8. Put the cursor on the desired location on the chart radar display. Click the Accept button.
9. Click Accept Manual Updates as Permanent. If you want to modify also properties continue from step 10.
10. If you want to modify properties, also click Accept.
11. If you want to modify the properties of the object click Edit Properties and values button. Otherwise continue
from step 9.
12. Pick from the list properties you want to modify and give them new values. You can also add new properties or
remove old.
13. Click Accept List and values to continue from step 5 or 11 again. Otherwise continue from step 9.
4.
2.
5.
3.
6.
8-17
8. Manual Updates
7.
8. Set positions with
cursor and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept button.
10.
11.
9.
12.
13.
8-18
8. Manual Updates
8.5.4
The mariner cannot permanently remove any of the official chart objects from the chart display. If mariner needs to
remove any of the official chart objects he is allowed to mark them as deleted. In practice the deleted chart object is
still visible, but it has a special presentation for a deleted object on top of it. To delete a chart object, do the
following:
2.
4.
5.
6.
3. Put cursor on
desired object
and push left
mouse button.
1.
Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-4 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2.
Click the Delete button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
3.
Put the cursor on the chart object to delete then push the left button.
4.
Choose the object from the Objects by Cell window. Confirm data for selected object.
5.
6.
Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to complete the deletion.
Note: If you deleted an official ENC chart object, a deletion mark is added over the original chart object that is still
visible. If you delete a manual update chart object, then it is removed from the chart display based on date of
deletion.
8-19
8. Manual Updates
8.5.5
2.
7.
3.
4.
6.
5.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-4 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2. In Manual Update Planning dialog box, click the Edit Properties button. An Object window appears.
3. Click the Edit Properties and values button. A Properties List and Values Edit window appears.
4. Add or remove features from/to the Properties List using >> and << buttons. To edit property value, highlight
desired value in the Properties List, then you can edit in the Property Value field using Alternatives field or enter
Numeric or Textual value. If the Object has a linked object, you can also edit those values. Click Edit
Master/Slaves relationship button to edit them. Make desired modifications in the Master/Slave relationship
edit window. After you have edited all the values of the linked objects, click the Accept button.
5. After you have edited all the values of the object you click the Accept List and Values button, if you want
continue from step 2 with the object. Otherwise continue from step 4.
6. Click the Accept button.
7. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.
8-20
8. Manual Updates
2.
5.
3.
4. Set cursor on
position and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept
button.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 8-4 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.
2. Press the Modify button, select object on chart then click the Edit Properties button. Object window appears.
An Object window appears.
3. Click the Edit Position button.
4. With the Position Edit window open, you can edit the position of the chosen chart feature. For further details, see
the next several pages.
5. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.
Example of how to modify a line
2) Put cursor on
point desired.
8-21
8. Manual Updates
2) Select
"Set Center".
8-22
8. Manual Updates
8.6
You can need to check when a manual update has been added into your chart radar. Also you can need to check
what was shown in your chart display three weeks ago. There are also many other cases when you need to know
what was known by your chart radar.
To check any situation in the past, you can use either Display Until and Approve Until to specify exact date of
interest. Alternatively, you can specify directly the number of the manual update planning session. See below.
To open the Manual Update Chart viewing dates window, open the Chart menu, choose Set Chart viewing dates. In
the Chart Viewing Dates window, click the Manual Update Dates button.
8-23
8. Manual Updates
8-24
9. Chart Alerts
The chart radar can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or detect an area where a specified
condition exists. If you plan a route or if prediction of own ship movement goes across a safety contour or an area
where a specified condition exists, the system will display a visual alert or sound an audible alert to alert you to
impending danger. For this function, the chart radar utilises the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the hard disk in
SENC format. Note that the chart radar calculates dangerous areas using the largest scale chart available, that
may not be the visualised chart.
You can choose objects that are included for calculation of danger area (for example, restricted areas). A window
lists the various areas that activate danger warnings.
You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can utilise these areas when
calculating chart alerts.
The chart radar can check the following for you:
Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas
9-1
9. Chart Alerts
9.1
Chart Alerts
Official S57 chart material contains depth contours that can be used for calculation of chart alerts. A chart database
also includes different types of objects that the operator can use for chart alerts. The procedure for setting chart
alerts is outlined below.
1.
Choose suitable safety contour for your own ship. See section 9.1.1 How to select safety contour.
2.
Check that "Chart Alerts" is set for display. See section 9.1.3 How to highlight chart alert areas. If you want
chart alerts to be included in some other objects or areas, choose them for indication or alert. See section 9.1.2
How to select objects used in chart alerts.
3.
In the route plan mode, define a new route or choose an existing one. Make a chart alert calculation of the route
if there are indications of danger areas in the route. For more information, see section 9.4 Route Planning.
Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alert calculation again.
4.
5.
The system is now ready for chart alert calculation of monitored route and estimated own ship position.
9.1.1
User has to choose safety depth suitable for the own ship. To choose suitable depth, do the following:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the guidance area then push the left
button.
2.
If the Chart page is not displayed, click the triangle mark to display it.
3.
Note: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automatically choose next deeper contour.
In the example above the safe water depth is set for 30 m.
9.1.2
You can also include calculation areas that have to be noted when sailing (for example, restricted areas). To include
these areas in chart alerts, do the following:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button.
2.
Choose Initial Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Put the cursor on the triangle inside the Initial Settings dialog box to open the Initial Settings menu.
4.
5.
Click the Chart Alerts tab to show the Chart Alerts dialog box. In the Ignore box at the top of the window, use
the left button to click the alert item you wish to process.
9-2
9. Chart Alerts
6.
Choose what alert type you desire. Click the Indication button to display visual alert, or Alarm/Warn button to
get the audible alert. The item chosen is moved from the Ignore box to the Indication or Alert Box as
appropriate.
7.
To remove an alert, click it in the Indication or Alert Box with the left button then click the Ignore button. To
change an alert method, click it in the Indication or Alert Box with the left button then click the Indication or
Alert button as appropriate.
8.
9.
Time and sector angle are explained in section 9.3 How to Activate Own Ship Check. Set them appropriately.
In the example at right above, a visual indication will be released when your vessel nears a User Chart Danger Area,
and an audio alarm will sound when your vessel goes into a Safety Contour or a Traffic Separation Zone.
9-3
9. Chart Alerts
List of areas
There are the areas that the chart radar detects and provides the audible alert or visual indication if estimated own
ship position or planned or monitored route crosses the area defined on the Chart Alerts page. You can choose from
the following areas:
"Safety Contour"
"Areas To Be Avoided"
"User Chart Danger Area"
"Traffic Separation Zone"
"Inshore Traffic Zone"
"Restricted Area"
"Caution Area"
"Offshore Production Area"
"Military Practice Area"
"Seaplane Landing Area"
"Submarine Transit Lane"
"Anchorage Area"
"Marine Farm / Aquaculture"
"PSSA Area"
9.1.3
The user can choose to highlight chart alert areas. Follow the procedure below to turn alert area highlighting on.
1. Spin the scrollwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display then push the
left mouse button.
2. Click the right or left arrow tab to choose the Chart page, as shown right.
3. In the Chart Alert box, choose ON position to highlight alert areas.
9-4
9. Chart Alerts
9.2
Symbols
For user chart symbols, use the option Danger Symbol in the Symbol page of the Plan User Chart dialog box. To
display this box, do the following:
1.
Put the cursor on User Chart in the sidebar then click the left button to open the User Chart dialog box.
2.
Click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box.
3.
Put cursor on black triangle on Plan User Chart dialog box then left-click.
4.
5.
6.
To include symbols in the chart alert, first check the Enables changes box then check the Danger Symbol box of the
Plan User Chart dialog box. Danger Symbol must checked, otherwise danger symbols of a user chart cannot not be
used in the chart alert. The dangerous symbol is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different
depending on Palette in use).
In the Symbol page, you can
include symbols in the chart
alert by checking Danger
Symbol.
Lines
To include lines in the chart alert, check the Danger Line box in the Line page of the Plan User Chart dialog box.
Danger Line must checked, otherwise danger lines of a user chart cannot not be used in the chart alert. The
dangerous line is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use).
In the Line page, you can
include lines in the chart alert
by checking Danger Line.
9-5
9. Chart Alerts
Areas
To include areas in the chart alert, check the Danger Area box in the Area page of the Plan User Chart dialog box.
Danger Area must checked, otherwise danger areas of a user chart cannot not be used in the chart alert. The
dangerous area is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use).
In the Area page, you can
include areas in the chart alert
by checking Danger Area.
The figure below shows the behavior of a dangerous symbol, line and area in the chart alert check.
Presentation of
Dangerous Area
Presentation of
Dangerous Symbol
Presentation of
Dangerous Line
9-6
9. Chart Alerts
9.3
Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is done using watch sector from own ship position. Sector size is
defined by time and angle. To set them, do the following:
Function keys
Operation
Parameter backup
Digitizer
Backup and Restore
Installation parameters
C-Map Ed3 installation
Radar Initialize
Navigation parameters
Priority Alert
Chart Alert parameters
Optimization parameters
1.
2.
Roll the scrollwheel to choose Initial Settings then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Put the cursor in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the menu displayed
at left.
4.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose Chart Alert parameters from the menu then
push the scrollwheel.
5.
6.
7.
Click the X at the top right corner to close the dialog box.
Selftest
Presentation Library
Access Server and Diagnostic
Close
9-7
9. Chart Alerts
The figures below show how a watch sector is displayed on the chart radar display.
(WT)
(WT)
(WAT)
Chart alert always uses the largest scale chart available no matter which chart is chosen for display.
9-8
9. Chart Alerts
9.4
Route Planning
The system will calculate chart alerts using user-defined channel limit for routes. Danger areas are shown
highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alert areas are crossed by the planned route. For more information
on route planning, see Chapter 10.
Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier than it is to take place, use
display and approve dates corresponding to the dates you are going to sail.
9.4.1
You can generate a list of chart alerts that cross by the planned route. This can be done as follows:
1.
Enter safety contour you want to use. See section 9.1.1 How to select safety contour.
2.
Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See Chapter 10.
3.
Choose dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the Alerts page in the Plan Route dialog
box, shown below.
a) Open the Plan Route dialog box by selecting User Chart and Plan in the sidebar.
b) Click the Alerts tab.
c) Check the Enable changes box, then click the alert to process from the Ignore during monitoring list then
click the Indication or Alarm/Warning button as appropriate to choose what type of alert you want.
4.
Click the Check tab then click the Start button to generate a list of chart alerts.
Alerts:
Alerts by leg
Legs by alert
Alerts:
Alert:
Planned Notes
The system will check a route leg by leg and when finished you will see the number of Legs and Alerts below
the tab buttons.
Legs by alert
Alerts: 11
Alerts by leg
Legs by alert
Alerts:
Alert:
Planned Notes
The figure above shows the alerts to be monitored. If there are alerts included in the planned route, check alerts
leg by leg, or check alerts by using category of alert.
9-9
9. Chart Alerts
9.4.2
After you have done chart alert calculation, the system is able to show you legs on the route where danger areas are
located. All the alerts for each leg where alerts occur are shown in the Alerts list. The list of alerts is based on
selections made in the Chart alert parameters sub menu. To find chart alerts by route leg, do the following:
1.
In the Check page of the Plan Route dialog box, the Alerts by leg field has a selection box where you can
choose desired leg number.
Legs by alert
Alerts: 11
Alerts by leg
Legs by alert
Alerts:
Alert:
Planned Notes
2.
Choose the Alert from the Alerts by leg field then click Locate leg button. The system will display chosen leg
on the electronic chart area as shown below.
9-10
9. Chart Alerts
9.4.3
After you have done chart alert calculation, the system is able to show you legs on the route where the chart alerts
are located. The system can show alerts by their category. To find chart alerts for a route by alert category, do the
following:
1.
In the Check page of the Plan Route dialog box, the Legs by alert field has a selection box where you can
choose desired leg number.
Legs by alert
Alerts: 11
Alerts by leg
Legs by alert
Alerts:
Alert:
Planned Notes
2.
Choose the leg number from the Leg field then click Locate leg button. The system will display chosen leg on
electronic chart area as shown below.
9-11
9. Chart Alerts
9.5
Route Monitoring
Route monitoring can be divided into two categories: own ship estimated position and monitored route.
(WT)
The figure above shows how the system highlights chart alerts inside channel limits of a monitored route and inside
predicted movement area of own ship.
Note: The system has a route monitor that facilitates
safe use of routes. You can check your route plan for
safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that
you intend to use together with a route plan. To show the
route monitor, choose Route-Monitor in the sidebar then
push the left button to show the Monitor Route dialog
box.
If the text "Checked conditions differ" appears at the
bottom of the Monitor Route dialog box, use the Alerts
page in this dialog box to verify difference between
actual and planned situation.
9-12
10-1
10.1
Create a new route or choose an existing one. See section 10.3 How to Create a New Route.
2.
Modify your route if necessary. See section 10.4 Modifying an Existing Route..
3.
Make chart alert (safe water) calculation. See section 10.3.3 How to use the Check page.
4.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar, and the following dialog box appears:
2.
Click the Plan button to open the Route Plan dialog box. The Plan Route dialog box appears together with the
Route Plan menu, shown below.
3.
The Route Plan menu is where you select, unselect or create a route. If it is not shown, that is, a route has been
selected, you can show it by placing the cursor on the triangle in the Route Plan dialog box.
Select: Choose an existing route and edit it for use. Choose Select from the
menu then push the scrollwheel, and a list box appears. Spin the scrollwheel to
choose appropriate route from the list box, push the scrollwheel to confirm then
click the OK button.
Unselect: Deselect a route here. The operation is similar to how you select a
route.
Create: Create a new route. An input box appears; enter name for new route,
using the scrollwheel. The route name may have up to 30 alphanumeric
characters..
Exchange with Monitored: This function exchanges planned and monitored
routes. Planned route is used both as alternative route and as an editable route.
NOTICE: Before using this function, set the next TO WPT on the Prepare page
of the Plan dialog box. If this is not done, and unintended waypoint could
become the TO WPT. If this occurs, right-click the TO WPT then enter correct
WPT.
10-2
Note: To display a planned route, make sure that desired options of the planned route (Center line, Channel borders,
WPT marks, Leg marks, etc.) are chosen to either Std or Other on the Route page in the Chart Display dialog box.
10.2
Selection of datum is very important, especially if you manually enter latitude-longitude positions or if you use a
digitizer. If you use the cursor to add and to modify waypoint locations, then you could use any datum, although it is
recommended to use native datum of the chart. For more information to choose datum, see section 12.3.
10-3
10.3
Select Route
Monitor
2.
6.
Plan
X
7.
5.
8.
WPT Alerts
WPT
Alerts
Alerts by Leg
Alerts:
9.
Legs by Alert
Alert:
WPT Alerts
2.
Left-click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
3.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the Route Plan menu.
4.
Choose Create.
5.
Enter a name (max. 30 alphanumeric characters) for the route by spinning the scrollwheel to choose character
desired and confirming desired character by pushing the scrollwheel. When name is ready, click the OK button.
6. Check Enable changes in the Plan Route dialog box. Choose position of a waypoint by placing the cursor on the
location desired on the electronic chart display then pushing the left mouse button. After entering a waypoint,
edit Name, Steering mode, Radius, Channel limit, Safety margin and Speed (Min, Max) as appropriate in the
Plan Route dialog box. (Put the cursor on an item, spin the scrollwheel to change value then push the
scrollwheel.) Do this for all waypoints of your route.
7. Use the Alerts page to define safety contour and other specified conditions for checking the route. Choose item
from a list then click Indication (to get a visual indication), Alarm (to get the audio alarm) or Ignore (to remove
check item) button as appropriate.
8. Use the Check page to detect areas where depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions
exist. The ECDIS can examine chart database against planned route to make a list of alerts where a route crosses
a safety contour or specified areas used in chart alerts. To create a list of alerts, click the Start button.
9. Use the Parameters page to enter Estimated Time of Departure (ETD) and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), if
you are using Time table optimizing. Choose desired optimizing mode from the Optimize window.
To print a waypoint report, open the Plan Route dialog box, put the cursor on the triangle to show the Plan Route
menu, choose Report or Full Report from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Click the Print Text button. (If you
want to change the font size, put the cursor on the triangle, choose font size then push the scrollwheel, before
clicking the Print Text button.)
10-4
10.3.1
WPT:
Name:
LAT:
LON:
Leg/
Bearing of leg
Leg/NM:
Mode:
Define steering mode, rhumb line or great circle, for each leg.
RAD/NM:
Ch LIM/m :
Margin/m
(Spd) MIN/kn:
(Spd) MAX/kn:
Insert before:
Insert after:
Add a new waypoint after current waypoint. You can define direction and distance for next
waypoint. (If the waypoint is not the last waypoint in a route, the button name changes to
Adjust after).
Delete WPT:
Import:
Import new waypoints from already existing routes into your current route.
Reverse route:
Display all:
Center line, channel borders, WPT marks and leg marks are made visible on top of the
electronic chart.
10-5
10.3.2
The Alerts page lets you define conditions along a route for which you want to be alerted, by visual or audible
indication. (You cannot get both visual and audible indications for a condition.) You can choose safety contour and
chart alerts used to check the safety of the route. This allows you to check safety with conditions different from
those chosen for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing conditions.
Enable changes
Chart objects in this list box are not used for chart alert calculation.
Chart objects in this list box are used for chart alert calculation. Only the visual
alert is released.
Alarm/warning during
monitoring
Chart objects in this list box are used for chart alert calculation. Both visual and
audible alerts of chosen chart objects are generated by the system.
Safety contour
10-6
10.3.3
The Check page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route. You also store the names of the user chart
and Notes to use during route monitoring together with planned route on this page. This storage happens when you
activate the safe water calculation by pushing the Start button. The stored names are the names of the planned user
chart and planned Notes.
10-7
10.3.4
The Parameters page allows you to set departure time and arrival time for your route. Also optimisation type is
chosen in this page.
Enable changes:
Description:
ETD/UTC:
ETA/UTC:
First part is planned estimated time of arrival to last waypoint. ETA can be calculated
between two specified waypoints.
Second part is calculated ETA that may differ from planned ETA if it is impossible for them
to agree with chosen optimization method. Also total length of the route is displayed.
Safety margin
MIN:
Speed limit:
Income:
Optimize:
Optimize types are max. speed, timetable, max profit and min. cost. (Description is provided
in section 10.5.1 "Available route optimization strategies".
10.3.5
The Prepare page allows you to prepare for exchange of planned route with monitored route. Use this page if you
are going to use the exchange function to choose planned route as monitored route. If you do not use this page to
define To WPT and Final WPT for steering in the plan mode, chart radar will choose the most suitable To WPT
based on own ship position and Final WPT based on waypoint selected on the Parameters page.
Alerts
10-8
10.4
10.4.1
Parameters
10.4.2
Enter latitude and longitude on the WPT page in the Plan Route dialog box.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar, click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box then click the
WPT tab.
2.
3.
Put the cursor in the Lat or Lon field as appropriate, spin the scrollwheel to set co-ordinates then push the
scrollwheel to confirm.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar, click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box then click the WPT tab.
2.
Check Enable changes, then highlight number of WPT by cursor then push the left button.
3.
Click the Next WPT button, and the following dialog box appears.
INSERT/MODIFY NEXT WPT
Current WPT: 1
Next WPT
NM
OK
4.
Enter Direction and Distance in respective box in the Next WPT field then click the OK button.
10-9
10.4.3
1.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar, click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box then click the WPT tab.
2.
Check Enable changes, then put the cursor on the waypoint you want to process.
3.
Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor to a desired position. Keep the
button pressed down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at desired position.
(WT)
WPT
WPT
Alerts
LAT
LON
Mode
RAD/NM CH lim/m
MIN/l\kn MAX/kn
WPT count
Adjust after
Delete WPT
4. Drag and drop waypoint to new position (in this case waypoint number 9 is taken to a new position).
10.4.4
To change other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max speed, do the following:
1.
Put the cursor on a desired field and spin the scrollwheel to change data.
2.
10.4.5
There are two ways by which you can add a new waypoint at the end of a route:
Use the cursor and left button to define position of a waypoint.
Use the Insert after button in the WPT page.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the
WPT tab to open the WPT page. Check Enable changes.
2.
Put the cursor in the electronic chart area on the location desired for a waypoint then push the left button. The
waypoint is added at the end of route.
3.
10-10
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the
WPT tab to open the WPT page. Check Enable changes.
2.
3.
Click the Adjust after button in the Waypoints page. Enter direction and distance for waypoint then click the
OK button.
Current WPT: 1
Next WPT
NM
OK
10.4.6
If you want to insert a waypoint between two waypoints, use the Insert before button, on the WPT page. This
inserts a waypoint next to current waypoint. For example, you want insert a new waypoint between waypoints 6 and
7. Choose WPT 7 then click the Insert before button. The new waypoint will be inserted between WPT 6 and WPT
7. WPT is highlighted on WPT list.
10.4.7
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the
WPT tab to open the WPT page. Check Enable changes.
2.
3.
10-11
10.4.8
You are able to choose waypoints from other routes to import them to current route. To import waypoints do the
following:
1.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar then click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the WPT tab to
open the WPT page. Check Enable changes.
2.
WPT total
WPT total
Number of WPTs
3.
In the Copy from window, put the cursor in the Route box, spin the scrollwheel to choose the route from which
to copy waypoints then push the scrollwheel.
4.
Enter first waypoint to copy in "First WPT to copy". Spin the scrollwheel to choose WPT number then push the
scrollwheel.
5.
Enter number of waypoints to copy in "Number of WPTs". Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired number then
push the scrollwheel.
6.
Enter where to import waypoints. To enter them after a WPT in a route, enter waypoint number in the "Copy
after WPT" box. If you want to enter them before a WPT in the route where WPTs will be imported, enter
waypoint number in the "Copy before WPT" box.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired number then push the scrollwheel.
7.
Choose copying order, Direct or Reverse. "Direct" copies the waypoints in their original order; "Reverse"
copies them in reverse order. Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired option then push the scrollwheel.
8.
9.
When finished, click X at top right corner of the dialog box to close the dialog box.
10-12
10.4.9
You are able to import waypoints from other External Device, like FURUNO GP-150 GPS Navigator to current
route. To import waypoints do the following:
1.
Put the cursor on Route in the sidebar then click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the WPT tab to
open the WPT page. Check Enable changes.
2.
WPT total
WPT total
Number of WPTs
Enter where to import waypoints. To enter them after a WPT in a route, enter waypoint number in the "Copy
after WPT" box (if applicable). If you want to enter them before a WPT in the route where WPTs will be
imported enter waypoint number in the "Copy before WPT" box.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired number then push the scrollwheel.
3.
WPT total
Copy after WPT
Copy before WPT
When WPTs are imported, you can monitor progress of it as it is shown below.
WPT IMPORT
WPT total
Copy after WPT
Copy before WPT
WPT total
Copy after WPT
Copy before WPT
4.
5.
When finished, click X at top right corner of the dialog box to close the dialog box.
10-13
2.
10.5
Route Optimization
10.5.1
After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box.
Optimization calculates all parameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuvering
start point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization:
Max Speed:
This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parameters and multiplies by all reduction factors
(weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be
entered, however it is calculated with user-entered ETD and Speed limit. ETA and ETD are shown on the Monitor
display.
Time Table:
Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded.
The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate speed to use. * If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the
Max. Speed calculation, the Max. speed -calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table ETA calculation
figure.. The calculated speed is shown on the Monitor display as "Suggested **.*kn".
Max. Profit:
Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most
profitable speed (highest profit per time unit). You need to set Optimization parameters beforehand to use this
feature. For further details, see section 19.1.4 Optimization parameters setting.
Min. Cost:
Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the speed
that gives the minimum total cost. You need to set Optimization parameters beforehand to use this feature. For
further details, see section 19.1.4 Optimization parameters setting.
.
10-14
10.5.2
Optimize a route
You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and Estimated Time of Arrival
(ETA) on the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box to optimize your route.
1.
Click the Parameters tab to open the Parameters page. Check Enable changes.
2.
Choose desired optimization strategy from the Optimize field. Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired strategy
then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Enter speed limit, ETC/UTC, ETA/UTC (Max. speed not required) in respective boxes.
10.5.3
A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These values are given while planning a
route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in the Parameters page of the Plan Route dialog box and in the
WPT page of the Plan Route dialog box you can give min. and max. speed for each leg. The table and illustration
below demonstrate how different optimize types and speed limits influence speed.
max speed (general)
17
WPT
min speed
cost
profit
timetable
Max speed
max speed
4.8
10.0
10.0
10
10
4.8
12.9
15.0
15
15
4.8
12.9
16.2
17
20
4.8
12.9
16.2
17
20
4.8
12.9
16.2
17
20
6.0
12.9
15.0
15
15
6.0
12.9
16.2
17
20
4.8
12.9
16.2
17
20
4.8
12.9
16.2
17
20
6.0
12.9
16.2
17
17
10
4.8
8.0
8.0
20
max_speed
15
timetable
10
profit
cost
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
min speed
Waypoint
10-15
10.6
Backup
10.7
This report is generated when you choose Report from the Plan Route menu. To display the report viewer, choose
Route-Plan from the sidebar, put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box, choose Report then push
the scrollwheel. To close the report viewer, click X in the right corner of the report viewer. The report may be
printed by clicking the Print Text button.
WPT report consists information of:
- Position of waypoints
- Planned speeds
- Planned courses
10-16
2.
Choose desired option from the list then push the scrollwheel.
10.8
The Full WPT Report provides detailed information on each waypoint in a plan route. To display the report viewer,
Put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box, choose Full WPT Report from the menu then push the
scrollwheel. The report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button.
10-17
10.9
Passage Plan report generates WPT report together with Notes report. The system automatically attaches Notes from
the plan mode on the route plan when you choose the Passage Plan report. To display the report viewer, choose
Route-Plan from the sidebar, put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box, choose Passage Plan Report
from the menu then push the scrollwheel. To close the report, click X in the right corner of the report viewer. The
report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button.
The example below shows that a passage plan has been generated using the route plan "SOUTHAMPTON
ROTTERDAM" and Notes generated for "SOUTHAMPTOROTTERDAM".
10-18
An example of passage plan report. Notes text notes are placed between waypoints based on their position (in which
leg defined Notes will be activated)
10-19
10-20
11.1
Monitor
Plan
To choose the route to monitor, put the cursor on Route in the sidebar, put the cursor in the Monitor combo box,
spin the scrollwheel to choose route then push the scrollwheel.
Note: When you choose a route for monitoring, the message shown below may appear when the geometry of the
route makes it impossible to sail the ship. Choose the Plan Route dialog box and make necessary modifications.
11-1
11.2
When you have chosen a route to monitor, the system chooses a next waypoint automatically. Check that the TO
waypoint is the desired one. The chart radar will automatically advance to a next waypoint when you pass the TO
waypoint.
The chart radar automatically sets the last waypoint of your monitored route as the final waypoint.
To choose TO waypoint, do the following:
1.
Open the Monitor Route dialog box, choose Route from the sidebar, then click the Monitor button.
2.
Put the cursor in the TO WPT box, then spin the scrollwheel to choose desired WPT.
3.
11.3
Normally you use the last waypoint in a monitored route as the final waypoint, and the chart radar automatically
does this when you choose the route to monitor. However, sometimes you can prefer to use some other waypoint as
the final waypoint of a monitored route.
To choose a waypoint as final waypoint, do the following:
1.
Open the Monitor Route dialog box; choose Route from the sidebar, then click the Monitor button.
2.
Put the cursor in the Final WPT box, spin the scrollwheel to choose a waypoint.
3.
11-2
11.4
WPT
WPT
LAT
LON
SPD CSE M
Rad
NAME
Planned ETA (UTC+1)
Speed limit
setting
ETD
ETA
11-3
11.5
To display a monitored route, make sure that desired options of the monitored route (center line, channel borders,
leg marks and wheel over line) are chosen on the Route page of the Symbol Display dialog box.
To show this display, spin the scrollwheel to show Symbol Display/Info/ in the
mouse functions area, push the left mouse button then click an arrow tab to
display the Route menu.
WPT mark enables display of a waypoint's number in a route.
Leg marks enables display of planned speed and planned course to steer in a
route.
Wheel over line enables display of a line that denotes turn start line for a
waypoint. This line appears when "WPT approach" is coming and disappears
when turning has started.
Do not set the following combinations of Center line, Channel limit and Safety
margin:
Center lines
Off
Off
On
11-4
Channel limit
Off
On
On
Safety margin
Off
On
On
11.6
Route Assistant
The system has a built-in route assistant that facilitates safe use of routes. During route planning, you can check
your route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and Notes that you intend to use together with a route
plan.
The assistant reminds you if
You are using a route that you have not checked following recent change to your route plan.
You use a combination of a route plan, user chart and Notes that you did not plan to be used together.
If the conditions defined during route plan do not meet the conditions during route monitoring, Mon. Route appears
in red on the sidebar.
The following
indications may appear
on the Monitoring page:
"This route is
unchecked".
Reminds you that you
did not check the route
plan after the route was
modified. Remedy:
check route plan for the
route.
"Checked conditions
differ" means that
current conditions differ
from set conditions of
route plan. Remedy:
Use Alerts and
Selections pages to set
them as they were when
route was planned.
11-5
11-6
Planned Notes:
Planned Notes:
11.7
You can monitor the route from the two Plan Speed windows in the information area.
Upper window
Plan: Planned course between previous WPT and "To WPT". Note that if
the gyro value is compensated and Gyro error correction and Gyro error
compensation have been enabled in Ship and Route parameters in the Initial
Settings menu, then the text "(corr)" appears (in red) in the Plan field.
Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route, including off
track, drift and gyro error compensation.
Permanent alerts are available regardless of the steering mode used and these are
as follows:
Lower window
Dist WOP: Distance to the point where rudder order for course change at
"To WPT" will be given.
Next: Planned course to steer after "To WPT". Note that if the gyro value is
compensated and Gyro error correction and Gyro error compensation have
been enabled in the Ship and Route parameters in the Initial Settings menu,
then the text "(corr)" appears (in red) in the Plan field.
Turn rate: Calculated rate of turn, which is based on current speed and
planned turning radius.
11-7
11.8
The chart radar calculates estimated time of arrival to a waypoint. The user can choose waypoint number and speed
profile for calculation in the Monitoring page of the Monitor Route dialog box.
To WPT: Indicates approaching "TO WPT".
ETA WPT: Indicates waypoint number of special ETA waypoint and estimated time and distance to it.
Final WPT: Indicates waypoint number of final waypoint and estimated time and distance to it.
Monitored route is optimized
using "Max Speed".
Speed profile:
There are three calculation strategies:
Trial: You can enter speed to test ETAs with different speeds.
Current: The system calculates ETAs using average speed of last five minutes. Note that if Speed profile is
chosen as Current, own ship average speed (i.e., speed for calculation) the Trial speed box replaces the Average
Speed box and trial speed is shown in that box.
11-8
.
Time table optimization
displayed in route monitoring
Plan final:
This displays ETA at final WPT. This value also appears in the Parameters page of the Plan Route dialog box.
Off Plan:
Indicates time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final WPT.
Suggested SPD:
The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the final WPT would be same as planned ETA if type of
optimization was "Time table".
The table below shows how the system calculates ETAs.
Type of chosen speed profile /
optimization on Route Monitor dialog
box
11-9
11.9
11-10
Introduction
User charts are simple overlay charts that the user makes for his or her own purposes. They can be displayed on both
the radar display and the electronic chart. These charts are intended for highlighting safety-related items like
position of important navigation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate alerts
and indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas. When route or own ship estimated position is
going to cross a user chart symbol, line or area that is defined as a dangerous one, an alert or indication is generated
by the system. For further details about chart alerts, see Chapter 9 Chart Alerts.
A user chart consists of points, lines and letter/number, symbols, etc. Size of user chart is limited to have the max.
number of items below:
200 Points
2000 Lines
1000 Symbols (alphanumerics)
50 Areas; an area can have 20 corner points.
The user chart is displayed on the radar display and its position and shape is based on the ships actual position.
When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on
the radar, with max. 80 nearest elements displayed. The user charts can also be shown on the chart radar display. In
this way the radar display can be kept as "clean" as possible for radar target detection.
12.1.1
Navigation lines: Displayed on both displays (radar + chart radar). Navigation lines are reference lines for
coast line.
Coast line: Displayed on the chart radar display only. Coastal line is usually a well-defined (by chart
digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline. The user is able to create this type of line in case there
is no suitable chart available over desired area in S57 format.
Depth contour: Displayed on the chart radar display only. Depth line shows the chosen depth levels. The
user is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in or S57
format.
Route line: Displayed on both radar and chart radar. Route lines are zones for anchoring, traffic separation
lines, etc.
Area: User can define closed areas, which the system can use to detect safe water areas. If route or estimated
ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to
specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available
regardless of the type of chart material used.
Symbols: User-selectable symbols can be displayed on both chart radar and ECDIS display or on the chart
radar display only. Symbols are used to indicate buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc. Symbols can be
used in chart alert calculation.
Tidals: Displayed on the chart radar display only. Tidals can be used to make own notes about tides at userdefined points.
Points: It doesn't itself have any symbol on the radar screen, but it is a very important element of a user chart
For further details, see section 12.2 What is a User Chart Point and how is it Used?.
12-1
12.1.2
A user chart can be chosen for the monitor mode, which means that it is displayed on connected Radar display and it
can be used in chart alert calculation. Another user chart mode modifies the user chart plan mode. In the plan mode,
a user chart is only displayed on the chart radar display; it is not displayed on the connected Radar nor is it used in
chart alert calculation. It is possible to have both the monitored and planned user chart at the same time if separate
plan and monitor units are used. Eventually the monitored and planned user charts copy the operation of monitored
and planned routes. Below is an example how to know which user chart is used for monitor mode and which one is
used in plan mode.
(WT)
User Chart
Monitor
X
DISP
Plan
DISP
The User Chart field in the information area where the user chart can be chosen for the monitoring or plan mode
12-2
Go Monitor(or Plan) mode: The user can switch user chart mode
between plan and monitor modes with Go Monitor(Plan) mode on the
menu. Push the scrollwheel to show the sub menu shown below.
Go Monitor mode>Go Monitor mode: Switch from plan mode to
monitor mode.
Go Monitor mode>Move Mon. to Plan mode: Switch user chart
currently used in plan mode to monitor mode.
Go Plan mode>Go Plan mode: Switch from monitor mode to plan
mode..
Go Plan mode>Move Plan to Mon. mode: Switch user chart
currently used in monitor mode to plan mode.
Select: User can specify user chart to use.
Unselect: Remove current user chart from active use.
Create: User can create a new user chart.
[User Chart]
Go Plan mode
Backup and Restore: User can make backup copy of user chart or
restore user chart from backup device.
Combine: User can combine two or more user charts together.
Select
Unselect
Backup and Restore
Point report
Line report
Area report
Symbols report
Full report
Report for radar
Close
Point report:
Generates report about points in a user chart.
Line report:
Generates report about lines in a user chart.
Area report:
Generates report about area objects in a user chart.
Symbols report:
Generates report about symbols in a user chart.
Tidal report:
Generates report about tides in a user chart.
Full report:
Generates report about all the objects in a user chart.
Report for radar:
Generates report about all the objects in a user chart that is displayed on the radar screen.
12-3
12.2
A point is a center point for a sub chart inside a user chart. Sub charts are small enough (max 80 elements) to be sent
for display on the radar. Sub charts are made with post processing, which is performed automatically, when you
leave editing (i.e., you uncheck Enable changes), you close the user chart window with the CANCEL button on the
keyboard-equipped control unit or you choose a user chart from the menu.
The system doesn't require any points if the amount of lines intended for the Radar display is less than 60 and if the
amount of symbols intended for the Radar display is less than 20. Note than lines are counted both from lines and
area objects.
If the user chart has more than 60 lines or 20 symbols and if the user chart does not contain any points, the system
will generate the alert "381 UserChart: Need Points" when you choose that user chart for use. It reminds you that
only a part of your lines will be visible on the connected Radar, if you don't define points.
The symbol used for points is box with "i" inside:
This is an example of a complex user chart with several hundreds of lines and symbols. The Radar can display max.
60 lines and 20 symbols from the complete user chart. Points are used to create sub-charts for Radar use. Each point
can collect 60 nearest lines and 20 nearest symbols in a sub chart.
12-4
Below are some examples of sub-charts. Note the position used for points to collect the sub charts.
12-5
12.3
Selection of datum is very important, especially if you manually enter latitude-longitude positions from the control
panel or keyboard or if you use digitizer. If you only use the cursor to add and to modify waypoint locations, then
you could use any datum, although it is recommended to use native datum of the chart.
12.4
The user chart that is chosen for the monitor mode is indicated next to UserChart in the sidebar. If "UChart" is red
this means that the workstation is currently displaying the user chart for the plan mode. To activate the monitor
mode and choose a user chart for the monitor mode, do the following:
(WT)
User Chart
Monitor
X
DISP
Plan
DISP
12-6
12.5
If "UserChart" in the sidebar is white (or black depending on color scheme in use) it means that the workstation is in
the monitor mode user chart. To activate the plan mode and choose a user chart for the plan mode, do the following:
1. Put the cursor on UserChart in the sidebar.
2. Put the cursor on the down triangle mark in the Plan box, spin the scrollwheel to choose user chart then
push the left button.
(WT)
User Chart
Monitor
X
DISP
X
Plan
DISP
X
12-7
12.6
You can create and modify a user chart when you have chosen the plan mode of user chart.
1.
2.
DISP
X
Plan
DISP
X
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Note: If you want to display a user chart on the electronic chart, make sure, that Points, Symbols & Tidals, Lines
and Areas of User chart are selected to Std or Oth from the Mariner page of the Chart Display menu.
To make a complete user chart, do the following:
1. Put the cursor on UserChart in the sidebar then click the Plan button. The Plan User Chart dialog box appears in
the information area.
2. Put the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Create from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Enter a
name for the user chart; spin the scrollwheel to choose character then push it to confirm character. Click the OK
button to finish.
3. Click the Line tab, check Enable changes then click the Add button. Spin the scrollwheel in the Element type
box to choose line type then push the scrollwheel. To start a new line from a new position, check "New start
position". Check "Danger Line" if you want to use the line in chart alert calculation. Use the cursor to specify
position for line point then push the left button.
4. Click the Symbol tab then check Enable changes. Click the Add button then Define Style (Symbol or Label),
Name and Symbol character in case of symbol. "Display on radar" is automatically chosen; uncheck it if you do
not want the symbol or label to appear on the radar. Check "Danger Symb" to use the symbol in chart alert
calculation. Use the cursor to choose position for symbol or label then push the left button.
5. Click the Area tab then check Enable changes. To make a new area, click the Add button in the Area field.
Define Name for area, define also if it is displayed on Radar display (On Radar) and used in Chart Alerts
calculation (Danger Area). Use the cursor to choose position for points then push the left button.
6. Click the Tidal tab then check Enable changes. To mark a tidal on the screen, use the mouse to locate the cursor
then push the left button. Define Name, Type, Orientation, Strength and Time for Tidal. The Tidal symbol is
displayed only on the ECDIS display.
7. Click the Point tab then check Enable changes. Use cursor and left button to define location of points.
12-8
12.6.1
Point page
Enable changes:
Point box:
Name:
Position:
Add:
Add new record next to current record with the same information.
Import:
Delete:
12-9
12.6.2
Symbol page
Enable changes:
Symbol box:
Style:
You can choose either Label (displayed only on chart radar) or Symbol (displayed also on TT
display).
Name:
Symbol:
If available, user can give name for displayed text on chart radar
Position:
Display on radar:
Danger Symbol:
Add:
Import:
Delete:
12-10
12.6.3
Line page
Enable changes:
Line box:
Name:
Element type:
User can choose appropriate line type from combo box. Available types are:
Navigation line
Route line
Depth contour
Coast line
Navigation and route lines may also be displayed on the Radar screen. Depth contours and
coastlines are visible only on the chart radar display.
Danger Line:
Start position:
End position:
Check to draw a new line. If unchecked, any newly entered line will be connected to
previous line.
Add:
This function adds new record next to current record. User can either edit position by
entering new co-ordinates or by showing new location with the trackball and left button.
Import:
Delete:
12-11
12.6.4
Tidal page
kn
Enable changes:
Tidal box:
Name:
Type:
Position:
You can enter speed, course and time for tide. Note that time of the tide is
always in local time.
Add:
Import:
User is able to choose from the list of user charts to import to current tidal
file.
Delete:
12-12
12.6.5
Area page
Enable changes:
Check in order to modify user chart.
Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode.
Area window
When a user defines an area for a user chart he adds an area object then gives a name and chooses if it is displayed
on radar and/or if it is used for safe water calculation (Danger Area).
Area box:
Number of current area appears in this field. User can choose area by editing desired
number in the Current box or create new one.
Name:
On Radar:
Danger Area:
Add:
Import:
Import area.
Delete:
Delete area.
12-13
Open the Area page as described on the previous page. Check Enable changes.
2.
3.
Give a name for the area and check Danger Area to use it in chart alert calculation and check "On Radar" to
show the area on the radar as well.
4.
Define corner points on the electronic chart area using the cursor and the left button.
5.
Enter desired area number in the box at the top of the Area window, and use the scrollwheel to enter applicable
number.
Use the Info feature to find area. Put the cursor on the desired corner point of the area on the electronic chart
then push the scrollwheel.
Open user chart then check Enable changes on the Plan User Chart dialog box.
2.
Choose appropriate chart scale so you can see desired area of user chart on display.
3.
Put the cursor on the corner point you want to move to a new position.
4.
While pressing and holding down the left button, roll the trackball to put the cursor on desired position. Keep
the button held down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at the position desired.
12-14
12.7
You can copy Areas of User Chart from another User Chart file to active User Chart file.
12.7.1
1.
Click the Import button in the Area field, and the User Chart Import
dialog box appears.
2.
In the Chart box, select chart from which to copy areas; spin the
scrollwheel to choose a chart then push the scrollwheel.
3.
"Total record count" shows number of areas stored in chosen user chart.
Enter into the "First record to copy" field the area number from which
you want to start copying.
4.
Enter in the "Number of records" field how many areas you want copy
into the active user chart file.
5.
Click the Copy button to copy chosen areas. If you do not want copy,
click the X at the top right corner to quit.
In this manual the term "user chart object" refers to any of point, symbol, line or tidal. The procedure for modifying
a user chart object is common to all user chart objects. To choose a user chart object to modify, open the appropriate
user chart object page in the Plan User Chart dialog box.
To modify user chart areas, see section 12.6.5 Area page.
To add a new user chart object you have following two methods available:
To add a new user chart object by using the left button, do the following:
1.
2.
Put the cursor in the electronic chart on the desired position then push the left button. New user chart object
appears.
3.
Modify data of added user chart object. For how to modify point, symbol, line and tidal data, see section 12.7.2
How to change other data of point, symbol, line or tidal.
To add a new user chart object by using the Add button, do the following:
1.
2.
Click the Add button in the chosen user chart object page. This adds a new user chart object to the end of file,
which is a copy of current user chart object.
3.
Modify position of user object. Modify position following "How to change position of a point, symbol, line or
tidal" on the next page.
4.
Modify other data of user chart object. For how to modify position, see section 12.7.2 How to change other data
of point, symbol, line or tidal.
12-15
Enter desired number of user chart object in the Current box. To change the number put the cursor in the
Current box, spin the scrollwheel to choose number then push the scrollwheel. Click the OK button.
Use the Info feature to find area. Put the cursor on the desired corner point of the area on the electronic chart
then push the scrollwheel.
Drag and drop a user chart object with the left button.
2.
3.
Enter co-ordinates in the Position field. To change a co-ordinate, put the cursor to the right of the digit to
change, in the appropriate box, push the left button, spin the scrollwheel to choose desired value then push the
scrollwheel. Note that lines have starting and ending point position fields.
How to drag and drop a user chart object to new WPT position
1.
2.
Put the cursor on the user chart object in the electronic chart area and press and hold down the left button while
rolling the trackball to position the user chart object.
3.
Keep the button pressed down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at the position
desired.
12.7.2
To change other data of a user chart object, such as name, symbol, element type, do the following:
1.
Choose desired user chart object. For more information, see "Choosing a point, symbol, line to modify"
2.
Put the cursor in desired edit box then use the scrollwheel to enter data. Push the scrollwheel to confirm.
12.7.3
2.
3.
Click the Delete button in the chosen user chart object page.
12-16
12.7.4
How to import points, symbols, lines or tidals from other user chart
User is able to choose User chart objects from other user chart to import them to current User chart. To import User
chart object do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
12.8
The chart radar allows you to combine two or more user charts into one user chart. To join two or more user charts,
do the following:
1.
In the sidebar Click UserChart followed by Plan to show the Plan User Chart dialog box.
2.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the Plan User Chart dialog box to display the menu.
3.
Choose a chart with "Select" and press the OK button, or choose "Create" and create a new chart.
4.
5.
From the Chart box, choose a chart then push the scrollwheel.
12-17
12.9
User charts can be displayed on the chart radar display, and you can choose which chart objects to display from the
Mariner page in the Symbol Display dialog box. Below are some examples from the same user chart with different
selections.
This user chart has all user
chart objects displayed.
An example with only radar part of lines, symbols and areas displayed
12-18
An example with only symbols and points displayed. Note that this is also a very good example how many and where
the points should be defined.
No symbols displayed
12-19
12.10 Reports
You can generate a report for each chart object (point, line, area, symbol and tidal) as follows:
1. Click UserChart in the sidebar then click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box.
2. Put the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the User Plan menu.
[User Chart]
Go Monitor mode
Select
Unselect
Create
Backup and Restore
Combine
Point report
Line report
Area report
Symbols report
Tidal report
Full report
Report for radar
Close
3. Choose desired report from the report group then push the scrollwheel.
4. To print the report, click the Print Text button.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired font size from the list then push the scrollwheel.
12-20
13. Notes
13.1
Introduction
A navigation-related notebook is called "Notes". Notes is a "notebook data" file that provides messages for the
operator relative to a specific ship position in the monitor mode. The user specifies range for each Notes record. The
chart radar compares Notes range and own ship position and displays Notes when own ship goes within the range
set for the Notes. (See figure below.)
The operator may assign a brief message that will appear on the radar display together with the notice of the
proximity of the relevant point.
While the ship sails, notebook pages (= records) in the chosen Notes file are compared with own ship position once
per minute to choose Notes. Further, when the ship has passed a waypoint, the system will make a comparison
against own ship position. If the system finds that you have arrived within a new Notes notebook page, it generates
the alert "850 Notes: New record".
Location of
Notes
Range
Location of
Notes
Distance less
than 10 NM
13-1
13. Notes
13.1.1
Notes modes
Notes can be chosen for the monitor mode, which means that Notes gives predefined messages for the operator
relative to a specific ship position. Another mode is for modifying Notes in the plan mode. In the plan mode, Notes
is used to define predefined messages relative to own ship position. Eventually the monitored and planned Notes
copy the operation of the monitored and planned routes. Below is an example of how to know which Notes is used
in the monitor mode and which is used in the plan mode.
(WT)
Select Notes
Monitor
X
DISP
Plan
DISP
The Notes field in the information area always shows the name of the Notes chosen for the monitor mode. If the
displayed Notes on the ECDIS display is the monitored Notes, then the text "Notes" is in black (or white depending
on color scheme). If the displayed Notes on the ECDIS display is the planned Notes, then the text "Notes" is in red.
The name of the planned Notes is only available in the dialog box for the plan mode of Notes.
13-2
13. Notes
13.2
Put the cursor on Notes in the sidebar, then click the Plan or Monitor button as appropriate. If no Notes is
chosen, the Notes menu (shown below) appears in addition to the Monitor Notes dialog box or Plan Notes
dialog box.
2.
If no menu appears, click the same button once more to open the menu.
Activate Monitor/Plan mode: User can switch Notes mode between plan and
monitor. Using
Go Monitor mode> Go Monitor mode, Notes used in the plan mode can be
switched directly to the monitor mode.
Go Plan mode> Go Plan mode, Notes used in the monitor mode can be switched
directly to the plan mode.
Select: Chooses Notes to use; monitor or plan mode.
Unselect: Unselect removes Notes from active use.
Create: Creates new Notes. Notes can be named, using up to 30 alphanumeric
characters.
Backup and Restore: User can make backup copy from Notes or restore from
backup media.
Report: Generates tabulated report from chosen Notes.
Note: If you want Notes to be displayed on the electronic chart, make sure that Notes options are turned on in the
Mariner page of the Chart Display dialog box.
1.
2.
3.
4.
THIS IS A TEST
THIS IS A TEST
i
Position
marker
Position marker
and text
Position marker
and range marker
Position marker,
text, and range marker
Four different variations as examples of how Notes is presented on the chart area:
1.
Position marker
2.
3.
4.
13-3
13. Notes
13.3
Notes that are for system use appear in the Notes field in the sidebar. If the text "Notes" is red this means that the
workstation is in the plan mode for Notes. To activate the monitor mode and choose Notes for the monitor mode, do
the following:
(WT)
Select Notes
Monitor
X
DISP
Plan
DISP
13-4
13. Notes
13.3.1
View record
box:
LAT, LON:
This indicates the latitude and longitude position of current record (LAT, LON).
Alert:
13-5
13. Notes
13.4
If the Notes in the sidebar is black (or white depending on color scheme) this means that the workstation is in the
monitor mode for Notes. To activate the plan mode and choose Notes for the plan mode, do the following:
(WT)
Select Notes
Monitor
X
DISP
Plan
DISP
13-6
13. Notes
13.4.1
Enable changes:
LAT, LON
Alert:
Range from own ship at which current Notes is activated on the screen or when passing notes
distance is fixed to 10 NM.
Description:
The operator may edit a Notes message record, which appears on the screen, after the ship has
passed the calculated point. To edit the text, put the cursor in the text window, spin the
scrollwheel to choose character then push the scrollwheel.
Add:
This function adds a new record next to current record. User can edit position by entering new
co-ordinates or by choosing new location with the trackball then pushing the left mouse
button.
Import:
You can import an existing file (whole file or part of file), to current Notes file.
Delete:
13-7
13. Notes
13.5
You can create and modify Notes, and this can be done in the plan mode. It is recommended to use the true motion
display mode while editing.
Select Notes
1.
Monitor
X
DISP
3.
Plan
DISP
2.
13.5.1
Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box and check Enable changes.
2.
Put the cursor on the location in the chart area where you want to add a new Notes, then push the left button.
New Notes record appears at the end of file.
3.
13-8
13. Notes
Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes.
2.
Click the Add button. This adds a new Notes record to the end of record, and it is a copy of current Notes
record.
3.
Modify position of Notes record. For how to modify position, see section 13.5.3 How to change Notes record
position.
4.
Modify other data of Notes record as appropriate. For how to modify other data in a Notes record, see section
13.5.4 How to change other data of Notes record.
13.5.2
The Current box in the Plan Notes dialog box shows the Notes currently selected for modification. To choose a
different Notes the following methods are available:
Enter desired record number in the Current box, using the scrollwheel; spin the scrollwheel to choose record
number then push the scrollwheel.
Put the cursor on desired Notes in the electronic chart area, then push the scrollwheel.
13.5.3
Enter latitude and longitude in the Position field on the Edit page.
Drag and drop Notes mark using the trackball and left button.
Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes.
2.
Choose desired Notes, following section 13.5.2 How to select Notes record to modify.
3.
Enter co-ordinate in Lat (Lon) field as appropriate. Spin the scrollwheel to change digit then push the
scrollwheel to confirm.
Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes.
2.
Use the trackball to put the cursor on the Notes you wish to move.
3.
Press and hold down the left button while rolling the trackball to position the Notes mark where desired. Keep
the button pressed and held down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at position
desired.
13.5.4
To change function range or character data of Notes, such as range and text, do the following:
1.
Choose desired Notes, following section 13.5.2 How to select Notes record to modify.
2.
Put the cursor in the desired edit box, spin the scrollwheel to choose desired value, then push the scrollwheel to
confirm.
13.5.5
Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes.
2.
Choose desired Notes, following section 13.5.2 How to select Notes record to modify.
3.
13-9
13. Notes
13.5.6
You can import Notes records from other Notes records as follows:
1.
Open the Edit page of the Plan Notes dialog box then check Enable changes. Click the Import button to show
the following dialog box.
2.
3.
Enter first Notes record to copy in the First page to copy field.
4.
Enter number of Notes records to copy in the Number of pages to copy field.
5.
"Copy to Notes" shows where the Notes record is to be copied to and "First page copied as page" shows the
number that the first record from the Notes source will be copied into the current Notes.
6.
After confirming settings, click the Copy button to import Notes records.
13-10
Introduction
There are several menus from which the user may initiate backup and restore functions. From those menus the user
may execute hard disk operations such as backup, copy, rename and delete. The user may make backup copies to
backup devices or restore from backup device to hard disk. These pushbuttons and menu commands, which are used
to access the systems database, are listed below.
Note: If you use floppy disks, use only PC-formatted disks.
The Backup & Restore dialog box is where backup and restore operations are initiated.
Operation on local
hard disk
Operation with all
files in category
Operation on backup
device/medium
Route plans
User charts
Notes
Installation parameters
Presentation libraries
Logs
Manual updates
You can choose desired category from the File category box in the Backup & Restore dialog box. For the chosen
category, the system shows all the possible functions executable with the chosen category.
14-1
14.2
File Operations
2.
3.
4.
Enter new name for chosen file then click the OK button.
2.
3.
4.
Enter new name for chosen file then click the OK button.
2.
3.
14.3
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4.
14-2
14.4
2.
3.
4.
2.
From the Hard Disk field, choose desired file then choose Inc in the Backup format box.
3.
4.
14.5
ASCII PROPRIETARY
2.
3.
4.
5.
14-3
ASCII PROPRIETARY
2.
3.
4.
5.
14-4
14.6
Chart
Chart backup
The chart radar lets you keep a chart database identical both in the hard disk of the chart radar and the hard disk of
the backup chart radar. If you want to make a backup of chart material to backup chart radar, open the Backup &
Restore dialog box and do the following:
1.
2.
Choose Drive for backup of chart radar at Drive in the Backup Device window.
3.
1
3
Note: To copy charts between chart radar workstations, it is recommended that you use the Restore function instead
of Backup. For use of Backup, see the illustration below for when it is possible to use the Backup function.
After the backup has been completed, the hard disk content of the backup chart radar is identical with backup chart
radar. However, the backup chart radar doesnt automatically start to use possible new material. To do this, open the
Chart menu and select System>Refresh Charts after backup from the menu.
14-5
2.
At Drive in the Backup Device window, choose the drive where backup chart radar is stored. Then, click the
Restore button.
Note: After the restore has been completed, the hard disk content of the backup chart radar is identical with backup
chart radar. However, the backup chart radar doesnt automatically start to use possible new material. To do this,
open the Chart menu and select System>Refresh Charts after backup from the menu.
14-6
The operator can choose navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the Sensors dialog
box. To access this dialog box, put the cursor on the Position field in the information area then push the right button.
Checkbox status shows whether a sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If there is no value shown for a
sensor this means that the sensor is not valid. Note that the content of these pages depends on sensors that are in use
on the ship.
15.1.1
15-1
Position sensors have priority, which is indicated as "primary" or "secondary". Only one sensor can be primary
while the others can be secondary or off. If a position sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and another
position sensor was chosen as primary, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically
selected to secondary state. When the position source is changed based on priorities and signal validity to another
position source, then you get the alert "409 Position source change". Note that alert 409 is active only when the
Kalman filter is off because the filter has its own process to calculate estimated position and in that process priority
given by primary and secondary is not used.
If a DGPS is chosen as primary or secondary, and its status changes from "no Diff" to "Diff" or from "Diff " to "no
Diff" the system generates the alert "727 DGPS pos. Source change" (alert numbers are from 727 to 732 depending
on position receiver).
"Pri no alert" and "Sec no alert" can be chosen from the DPGS box if you want to disable the alert "727 DGPS pos.
source change". These selections are intended for the area where the differential coverage is fading. One example is
if you sail along coastline but you are so far away that the differential signal changes its status very often.
The system generates the alert "738 Datum mismatch" (alert numbers are from 738 to 743 depending on the position
receiver) if output datum of a chosen position sensor (status other than Off) is changed from WGS-84 to another
datum or if chosen position sensor does not send datum message. Additional text "datum" appears, in red. Further,
lat/lon values for the position sensor turn red. If the position sensor is also used for system position, Kalman filter
and your ship's position (Lat/Lon values and datum used) are indicated in red. If output datum of a chosen position
sensor is changed from no datum message or another datum to WGS-84 and the operator has used the selection
Primary or Secondary, then the system generates the alert "744 Datum change" (alert numbers are from 744 to 749
depending on position receiver).
Note: The ability to check datum of position is a relatively new feature for position receivers. It was introduced in
standard IEC 61162-1 Ed2, published in July 2000. Only EPFS (for example GPS or DGPS) that has "IEC 61162-1
Ed 2 (2000-7)" indicated in their type approval certificate can support the ECDIS to detect datum mismatch.
15-2
The system generates the alert "407 Position discrepancy" if there is discrepancy in position. Together with this
alert, the system shows the text "Discrepancy" in red in the Position page for a position sensor that has position
discrepancy active.
Enable: Check to align chart, using the "drag and drop" feature.
Chart alignment: Alignment is automatically chosen if the user has defined position offset by using the chart align
feature. The offset values are given in nautical miles and degrees. If position alignment is used, the user is reminded
of it every 30 minutes by the alert "411 ChartAlign: over 30 min".
Dead rec: The system automatically chooses dead reckoning if there are no valid and chosen position sources and if
there are valid and chosen speed and course sources. If the system has chosen dead reckoning, then the user can
enter a new position for the ship in the Lat and Lon fields.
Kalman filter: The Kalman filter calculates estimated position using all valid and chosen position, speed and course
sensors. Choose On to activate this feature.
Others page
Set and Drift: See description below.
Wind: Wind (True or North) speed (kn or m/s) and
direction are displayed. Note that true wind is wind
relative to own ship heading. For further details, see
section 15.8 Wind Sensor.
Depth below trans: Depth from hull at bow and aft to
bottom. A depth alert value may be entered to alert you
to
Temperature: Water surface temperature.
Water current: Tide at current position.
AIS targets: Status of AIS data.
Set and drift: Check the Manual box to manually set
speed and course of drift.
Note that you can choose manual drift only if there are
no automatic sources for SOG and COG. In other
words, you have neither a dual-axis log nor any position
receiver available.
Angle = Difference between heading and COG
Drift = Speed component of the drift vector
Set = Course component of the drift vector
Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to
vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD and HDG)
and (set and drift).
15-3
North
SOG
COG
crs
HDG
spd
SPD
gle
an
15.2
SPD:
HDG:
SOG:
COG:
spd:
crs:
angle:
water speed
heading of ship
speed over ground
course over ground
speed of drift
course of drift
difference between HDG and COG
Source of Position
The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The Kalman filter uses all position sensors that have
either primary or secondary as input for its calculation. DGPS and SYLEDIS position sensors are considered more
accurate than other position sensors.
The latitude and longitude position is shown at the upper right corner on the chart radar display, and in the example
below the position source is DGPS. Other indications that may be displayed in the position area are as follows:
NO POSIT: Appears (in red) when no dead reckoning sensors are chosen and valid.
DEAD REC: Shown (in red) when position source is dead reckoning.
LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the user-selected DGPS device has lost the DGPS signal.
FIL LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the Kalman filter is in use and the user-selected DGPS device has lost
the DGPS signal.
FILTER HIGH: Shown when the position source is the Kalman filter with high-precision position sensor.
FILTER: Shown when position source is the Kalman filter without high-precision position sensor.
BAD FILTER: Shown (in red) when position source is the Kalman filter and the filter has excluded at least one
of the chosen sensors because of poor accuracy.
15-4
KALMAN filter
HDG 071.0
SPD (WT)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
Selected and
No position
15.6 kn
0.0 kn
071.0
15.6 kn
Position
used by
the system
Selected and
position exist
Backup
Dead Reckoning
5931.206'N
02436.731'E
WGS (POSN)
84
DGPS(POSN)
(POSN)
If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data or the differential mode is changed on a
DPGS device, the system immediately generates the alert "409 Position source change". If the Kalman filter is used,
the system generates the alert "410 Filter: Pos source change" after a time out period of 90 sec.
If a chosen DGPS sensor changes its operation mode and its status is primary or secondary, then the system
generates the alert "727 DGPS pos. source change" (727 for first sensor, 728 for second, etc.). These alerts are not
generated if the operator has chosen Pri no alert or Sec no alert.
If source of position includes a position sensor that is in datum mismatch condition, the latitude, longitude and
chosen datum are displayed in red.
15-5
15.3
The system has three different positions for own ship: System position, primary position and secondary position:
System position: Used for navigation and steering. See section 15.2 Source of Position.
Primary position: Position generated by position source chosen as primary position source.
Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as secondary position source.
The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen either as Primary or as Pri no alert on the Position
page of the Sensors dialog box.
The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen either as Secondary or as Sec no alert on the
Position page of the Sensors dialog box. Secondary position of own ship is not available as latitude/longitude value
for the user.
GPS in diff. mode
or SYLEDIS
selected as
SECONDARY
Not selected
or no position
Selected and
position exists
Secondary
position
of the
own ship
used by
the system
Secondary position
of own ship is
is not valid
15.4
15-6
15.5
The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. "SOG, COG" is speed over ground and
course over ground, respectively. "Speed" is speed over water, "Drift" is the difference between speed over water
and speed over ground. Docking speed components are bow speed (transversal), stern speed (transversal) and center
speed (longitudinal).
Heading used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the chart radar display. In the example shown
below, heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is shown without additional text, meaning the value is
referenced to true North. Additional gyro-related text that may appear are "(mag)" if the value is referenced to
magnetic North, "(man)" if the value has been manually entered; or "(corr)", which is displayed in red, if the value
includes gyro correction.
Selected
Manual
COURSE
Not selected
GYRO 1
Heading
used by
the system
Not selected
or no value
GYRO 2
HDG
SPD (WT)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
071.0
15.6 kn
0.0 kn
071.0
15.6 kn
Not selected
or no value
5931.206'N
02436.731'E
GYRO from
RADAR
Not available
WGS 84
DGPS
Available
Alarm 402
No Course
Available
ROT used by the system is shown in the Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog box. The Rate Gyro field shows
the text "(calc.)" when the system calculates ROT from movement of heading. No text is shown when the value is
received from an ROT gyro.
Calculated ROT
from movement
of Heading
ROT Gyro
No value
Value exists
ROT
used by
system
Alarm 718
ROT gyro error
15-7
SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the Chart Radar display. In the example below,
COG and SOG are from chosen position sensors and this is indicated with the text "(pos)". Other text that denotes
SOG/COG source are
(BOT):
Bottom tracking dual-axis log
(CALC):
Speed calculated from SOG
(WT):
Water tracking log
(RDR):
Mixed sources of COG and SOG in the connected radar
(POSN):
Average of chosen position sensors
(FILTER): Kalman filter
(MAN):
Manual entry
Note that (pos), (bot), (wat) and (man) could come from direct interfaces of the system or from the connected radar.
Average of
SOG/COG from all
selected DGPS,
GPS or SYLEDIS
DUAL LOG
(Bottom track of
dual-axis doppler
log)
Not selected
or no value
RADAR
(measures
SOG/COG
from target
= Autodrift)
Not selected
or no value
Not selected
or no value
HDG
SPD (WT)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
071.0
15.6 kn
0.0 kn
071.0
15.6 kn
5931.206'N
02436.731'E
Average of
SOG/COG from all
selected Decca,
Loran or
Ref.Target
KALMAN filter
calculation result
from the movement
of position
Not selected
or no value
Not selected
or no value
WGS 84
DGPS
Selected and
value exists
Water speed
and
Gyro heading
The figure below show the source of docking speed components used for the predictor.
Installation parameter offset values
ROT used by the system
SOG/COG used by the system
Speed (water speed) used by the system
Heading used by the system
15-8
Calculator
Bow and
stern speed
used by
the system
SOG/COG
used by
the system
The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation.
Selected
Manual
SPEED
LOG
(Water track of
dual-axis doppler
log OR pi lot log)
Not selected
Not selected
or no value
HDG
SPD (WT)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
071.0
1.8 kn
1.7 kn
045.1
2.0 kn
RADAR
(measures
water speed)
Not selected
or no value
5931.206'N
02436.731'E
SOG, if available
from any of
selected position
receiver
Not available
WGS 84
DGPS
Speed
used by
the system
(water
speed)
Available
Alarm 401
No Speed
Available
Drift used by the system is shown in the Other page of the Sensors dialog box. In the example below, set and drift
have been entered manually since the Manual box is checked. Other text that may appear to show source of set and
drift are
(LOG): Log or dual-axis log
(POSN) Position sensor
(FILTER):
Kalman filter
(MAN): Manual entry..
Manual
DRIFT
Selected
Not selected
Drift
used by
the system
Calculator
15-9
Alert related to SOG, COG, speed, heading, ROT, drift and docking speed components
It is possible that the operator has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that the chosen sensors do not have
any valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning.
When no speed source is available, the system generates the alert "401 No speed available". When no heading
source is available the system generates the alert " 402 No heading available".
The system may find that SOG and/or COG from the sensors are unreliable, at which time it generates the alert "413
SOG&COG unreliable". Note that the source of SOG and COG is not only speed and course sensors, but the source
can also be position-fixing equipment.
Verify and choose valid sensors in the SPD/CRS and POSN pages of the Sensors dialog box for SOG and COG used
by the system.
15.6
Kalman Filter
The chart radar has an automatic multi-sensor Kalman filter for position. The filter can calculate estimated position
using all operative position sensors.
To view position sensor status, put the cursor on the Position indication, confirm that Sensors appears in the mouse
functions area then push the right mouse button.
Operator can manually include or exclude sensors. Remaining sensors (= sensors with any selection other than OFF)
are included in the filter processing. The purpose of this filter is to continuously monitor the position given by each
individual sensor to determine if the sensor is reliable or not. Also chosen gyro and log sensors are included into this
analysis. The filter knows the behavior of different types of sensors (Loran, Decca, GPS, DGPS, etc.). The result of
the processing is a smoothed position that is used as final position of the ship. The filter eliminates all "position
jumps" in the final position even if there is a position jump in a sensor. (A position jump is caused by line change in
Decca, loss of differential signal with DGPS, etc.)
The filter can be selected or deselected by switching it ON or OFF. When switching filter state from ON to OFF,
new start position of the filter is set as an average value of the enabled sensors (sensors with any selection other than
OFF). Change the filter state from OFF to ON, and the filter continues processing from current position.
When the filter is chosen, alerts are generated if the system does not have a valid position available. No alerts are
generated for position jumps of the position sensors chosen to be used with the filter as long as the filter is able to
estimate a reliable position based on chosen position sensors. If there is a change in the availability of the sensor
chosen with the Kalman filter and if the filter cannot continue the same level of position accuracy, then the system
generates the alert "410 Filter: Pos source change". This change of available sensor may or may not affect the
operation of the filter.
The filter requires at least one position sensor and one course sensor (i.e., gyro) chosen and valid in order to operate.
The filter has one main alert "400 Filter: Pos unreliable". This alert means that the filter is not able to calculate the
position from the connected sensors. This can happen if there is only one position sensor connected and the position
generated by it becomes unreliable or if there are more position sensors but they are deviating too much. Alert can
appear also if the speed/course sensor (Log or Gyro) is found to be unreliable. Note that the filter indicates
unreliable position sensor by showing position in red.
If the filter is used without automatic route steering then, in case of alert 400, only the filter itself is set in the OFF
state. After generating the alert 400, the system will use its normal method to choose position source from available
sensor. Normally, this causes a jump in the position. After the alert 400 is generated, the operator should evaluate
which sensor caused the problem. Disable the bad sensor then turn the filter ON again.
The Kalman filter is designed to support automatic route steering and thus it requires that you have some speed. If
the speed is less than the value set in the installation parameters (for example 4 kn), the system generates the alert
"408 Filter: Speed below 4 kn". If you don't use automatic route steering, the system also chooses the filter as OFF
after generating the alert 408. With automatic route steering the system keeps the filter chosen, but repeats alert 408.
The system can check that each chosen position sensor is within position discrepancy limit set by the operator. (For
further details, see section 15.4 Position Discrepancy Alert.) If a position sensor has position discrepancy active, it is
automatically excluded from the Kalman filter. This feature enables the operator to control how much discrepancy
there can be between the Kalman filter position and any position sensor.
15-10
15.6.1
Position alignment
The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ships position by using radar, radar echo target and chart radar
chart material.
If position alignment is in use, the chart radar will generate the following alert every 30 minutes to remind the user
to align position: "411 ChartAlign: over 30 min".
15.6.2
If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly, there is either position error or gyro error or some
combination of these errors.
Position may be aligned on the chart radar display by moving own ship position or by moving Radar target position.
Moving is done by dragging and dropping own ship symbol or Radar target to desired location. Drag and drop
means that you place the object on desired location by rolling the trackball while pressing and holding down the left
button then "anchoring" the object by releasing the left button.
Note: If the radar is on the chart radar display when position alignment is done, then
Chart radar temporarily uses radar color also for own ship and TTs symbols.
2.
Put the cursor on the position indication in the information area then push the right button to display the Sensors
dialog box. Open the Posn page, then check Chart Align.
3.
Use the trackball and the left button to drag and drop a symbol or suitable chart detail on a radar target. See
figures below.
If the position source is dead reckoning, the position set with chart alignment is the new start position for dead
reckoning. In this case, there is no offset and the text indication OFFSET does not appear. If the position source
is something other than dead reckoning, then the indication OFFSET is displayed at the upper part of the
information area. Also the range and bearing of the offset are shown in the Posn page of the Sensors dialog box.
15-11
15.6.3
Open the Sensors dialog box then open the Position page.
2.
.
3.
Check that the indication Offset is not shown in the upper part of the information area, to the right of the
position source indication.
HDG
SPD (WT)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
071.0
15.6 kn
0.0 kn
071.0
15.6 kn
5931.206'N
02436.731'E
WGS 84
DGPS
15-12
15.7
Typical gyro error sources are installation error, speed/latitude error and dynamic settling error. Typically you detect
gyro error on a user chart superimposed on the TT picture, on TTs drawn on the chart radar display or on radar
drawn on the chart radar display.
Gyro error correction is used to remove the difference between the chart north and the gyro north.
Gyro error can be corrected totally or partially in the gyro compass system itself. Many gyro compass systems have
automatic speed/latitude corrector, which may use automatic or manual input for speed and latitude. Some
gyrocompass systems also include correction for dynamic settling error.
Automatic gyro error correction based on tabled speed/latitude correction can be used, if the gyrocompass itself does
not make any corresponding correction.
Gyro error compensation can be used to:
HDG
SPD (WT)
SB (POSN)
COG (POSN)
SOG (POSN)
071.0
15.6 kn
0.0 kn
071.0
15.6 kn
5931.206'N
02436.731'E
WGS 84
DGPS
POSN
15-13
15.7.1
To enable gyro error correction, which is effective for radar, chart radar and route steering, do the following:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area, push the left button, choose Initial
Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
2.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog box, choose Navigation Parameters from the menu
then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Choose Ship and Route parameters from the sub menu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
Put the cursor in the Source box in the Gyro error correction field, spin the scrollwheel to choose Auto then
push the scrollwheel. This enables automatic gyro correction.
Function keys
Operation
Parameter backup
Digitizer
Backup and Restore
Installation parameters
C-Map Ed3 installation
Radar Initialize
Navigation parameters
Priority Alert
Chart Alert parameters
Optimization parameters
Selftest
Presentation Library
Access Server and Diagnostic
Close
Gyro correction related settings in Ship parameters field in Ship and Route parameters dialog
box
Gyro correction field
Source:
Off: Disables any gyro error correction.
Manual: Enables manual gyro error correction, in the Manual gyro correction field.
Gyro spd/lat error: Chooses the automatic gyro error compensation based on tabled speed/latitude correction. Gyro
error correction must be set for Auto for Gyro spd/lat error to be effective.
Max corr: Sets limit for maximum correction allowed. Typical value is 3 degrees.
Manual corr: Adjusts gyro error manually. Note that to enable this function you have to switch Gyro error
correction to the Manual position.
15-14
15.8
Wind Sensor
chart radar can display and output wind data in the following three formats:
Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction.
Wind angle reference: Heading
North: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: True North
Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: Heading
The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data.
The wind values are as shown below.
Ship information:
COG: 60 SOG: 8.7 kn
Heading: 45
Apparent:
North:
Theoretical:
Wind angle
345
330
285
Wind speed
10 kn
5 kn
5 kn
North
Wind from NNW (330)
Wind Angle
(Apparent: 345)
Wind speed
(apparent: 10 kn)
Apparent Wind
Heading
True Wind
Ship's Speed
(SOG: 8.7 kn)
Wind Speed
(North/Theoretical: 5.0 kn)
Angle (reference North)
Wind Angle
(Theoretical: 285)
Wind Angle
(North: 330)
15-15
True wind or Relative wind may be selected from the Other dialog box in the Sensors menu.
15.8.1
Description
Display format
Option
True wind
Theoretical
North
Apparent
North
Apparent
Theoretical
15-16
Output to radar
Option
Output T(=True/North) only
Output T(=True/Theoretical) only
Output R(=Rel/Apparent) only
Output R(=Rel/Theoretical) only
The output sentence of the items
below changes according to setting
of Rel Wind and True Wind.
Output T(=True/North) or
R(=Apparent)
Output T(=True/North) or
R(=Theoretical)
Output T(=True/Theoretical) or
R(=Apparent)
15.9
Description
The reference field of the MWV sentence is T(True) and North data is
output.
The reference field of the MWV sentence is T(True) and Theoretical data is
output.
The reference field of the MWV sentence is R(Relative) and Apparent data
is output.
The reference field of the MWV sentence is R(Relative) and Theoretical
data is output.
Option on Sensor dialog box
Rel Wind
True wind
The reference field of the MWV
sentence is R(Relative) and
Apparent data is output.
The reference field of the MWV
sentence is R(Relative) and
Theoretical data is output.
The reference field of the MWV
sentence is R(Relative) and
Apparent data is output.
Depth Sensor
The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the Other page in the Sensors dialog
box.
The content of the Other page in the
Sensor menu depends on sensors
connected.
In this example there are two transducers
(bow and aft) installed.
The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can activate an alert, in the Echo
alert box, based on the depth below the transducer. If the measured depth is less than the set at Echo alert, the
system generates the alert "320 Depth below limit".
15-17
15-18
Records entire voyage, i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to the last.
Details log:
Alert log:
16.1
The Events and Man Overboard (MOB) functions are accessed with the mouse. Spin the scrollwheel to display
Event/Info/MOB in the guidance area then push the left or right button as appropriate.
Left button (Event): Records an event to the logbook. You can also write a comment for this event. It is displayed
only in the electronic chart area if Events is chosen for display in the Tracking page of the Symbol Display dialog
box.
Right button (MOB): Records MOB position to the logbook. Position of this event is also displayed on the chart as
an orange square with a diagonal line running through it, as shown below. You can add a comment (up to 48
alphanumeric characters) to an MOB mark by selecting the mark then pushing the left button. The Event Description
window appears. Enter comment and click the OK button.
The chart radar can display Events and MOB. These events are also recorded
into the Voyage log.
16-1
16.2
Details Log
The details log contains voyage information of the last 12 hours. Various information is recorded in the details log
once per minute.
Heading.
16.2.1
2.
3.
Choose Details Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
The following window appears. Confirm that you want to open the log by
clicking the OK button. Otherwise click the Cancel button.
Alert Log
Alert Queue
Lon
Align/NM
Align/
SOG/kn
COG/
HDG/
CORR/
Use First 1000, Prev 1000, Next 1000 and Last xxx (xxx=number, in above example it is 449) buttons to select
desired time to be listed in the log viewer.
Note: For how to make a user chart from this log and other logs, see section 16.9 Making a User Chart from a Log
(past track).
16-2
16.3
Voyage Log
The voyage log holds data for the entire voyage. Recorded events are:
Changes of course and speed. User can define limits for course change and speed change of own ship to be
recorded. This data is filed in the log as type "Ship".
User is able to define time period, how often there is a recording regardless of course or speed changes. (For
example, once per 4 hours). This data is filed in the log as type "Auto".
Man Over Board event. This data is filed in the log as type "MOB".
Standard event. This data is filed in the log as type "User".
Alerts generated by the system. User is able to choose alerts, which are recorded into the Voyage log. This data
is filed in the log as type "Alert".
Positions. This data is filed in the log as type "Posdev".
Each log entry also contains wind speed and direction, depth information and distance counter value.
16.3.1
2.
Choose Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel. Choose Voyage
Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
The following window appears. Confirm that you want to open the log by
clicking the OK button. Otherwise click the Cancel button.
Alert Log
Alert Queue
LAT
Wind/
Wind/
DIST/NM Depth/m
Description
Use First 1000, Prev 1000, Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in the log viewer.
Note: You can add a description to a log entry. Check Enable changes then enter description desired in the text box,
using the scrollwheel.
16-3
16.3.2
The operator can define limits for course change and speed change of own ship to be recorded and also time period
for automatic logging. To set them, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the Voyage page is not already open, click the Voyage tab to open it.
5.
Set desired limits for speed and course and also logging interval, using the
scrollwheel. When the speed or course changes by the amount set here, a
log entry is made.
6.
Choose alerts (alert numbers) to record, in the Alerts window. For alert
numbers and their meanings, see Chapter 9 Chart Alerts.
Alert Log
Alert Queue
16.3.3
For how to empty the voyage log, see section 16.8 How to Reset (emptying) Voyage and Danger Target Logs. A
backup copy of the voyage log can be made. See section 16.7 How to Make Backup Copy from Log for details.
16-4
16.3.4
Recording positions
The operator may manually save positions to the voyage log in various ways. These are:
Positions calculated by the system (in example below such are Kalman filter and Dead reckoning)
User observations. (Visual, astronomical and MFDF. MFDF is Medium Frequency Direction Finder.)
16-5
16-6
16.4
The danger target log stores information about targets that are received from a radar (TTs) and/or targets that are
received from an AIS transponder (AIS targets).
If a TT or AIS target is within the set CPA and TCPA, information of all TTs (including non-dangerous targets) are
recorded into the danger target log. This data is as follows:
Date and time, index of target (number of TT on Radar or IMO MMSI number from AIS transponder).
Position (Lat, Lon), speed (Spd) and course (Crs) of both AIS and TTs.
16.4.1
2.
3.
Choose Danger Target Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
The following window appears. Confirm that you want to open the log by
clicking the OK button. Otherwise click the Cancel button.
Alert Log
Alert Queue
LAT
LON
SPD/kn
First 1000
CRS/
HDG/
Prev 1000
CPA/
TCPA/
Index
Last 449
Use First 1000, Prev 1000, Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in the log viewer.
16-7
16.4.2
The operator may set Closest Point of Arrival (CPA), Time for CPA (TCPA) and Log interval for viewing
dangerous TT and AIS targets on the chart radar display. User can also alternatively log only information of a single
chosen TT or AIS target.
1. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions
area then push the left mouse button.
2. Choose Record from the menu and Settings from the submenu.
3. If the Danger Targets page is not already open, click the Danger Targets tab
to open it.
Alert Log
Alert Queue
16.4.3
16-8
16.5
The chart usage log stores which charts were displayed on the chart radar chart display area or which were used for
chart alerts. The following information is recorded in the chart usage log:
Chart ID
Chart edition
16.6
This procedure is the same if you make User Chart from Details, Voyage or Danger Target log.
16.6.1
1.
Open the Main menu, choose Record then choose appropriate Log item. The example below shows the Details
Log.
Lat
2.
Lon
Align/NM
Align/
SOG/kn
COG/
HDG/
CORR/
Put the cursor on the triangle to show Log File menu and select Print Log.
3. To print a log, click the Print Log button. To print whole log, select Print All from the menu.
4.
A Print dialog box appears, click the OK button. The entire log will be printed.
16-9
16.6.2
In each log (Details, Voyage or Danger Targets log) you can choose font size for printed version. To change font
size, do the following:
1.
2.
Put the cursor on the triangle on the upper left corner and select Print Font.
3.
16.7
If necessary you can make a backup copy of chart radar logs onto a floppy disk or a USB memory as follows:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button.
2.
3.
Choose Backup and Restore from the menu then push the scrollwheel to show the Backup and Restore dialog
box.
4.
Choose desired log and drive for backup copy. Then, click the Backup button.
16-10
16.8
It may be useful to reset (empty) the voyage and danger target logs when you are starting a new voyage. If
necessary, make a backup copy before resetting. To reset a log, do the following:
Alert Log
Alert Queue
16.9
1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose the log to reset from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
5.
The system will ask you if you are sure to reset chosen log. Click the OK
button to reset the chosen log.
You can create a user chart from any log among details, voyage and danger target. The past track of the Danger Log
target is useful for making a use chart from a single target.
1. Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the left mouse
button. Choose Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
2. Choose the log (Details, Voyage, Danger Target) from which you want to make a user chart then push the
scrollwheel.
3.
4.
LON
Align/NM
Align/
SOG/kn
COG/
HDG/
CORR/
16-11
5.
Click the triangle and select "Save as User Chart" to show log.
6.
8.
Note: If your chosen range for conversion from log to user chart contains periods of invalid your ship's positions,
then the user chart has a gap in the line for these periods.
16-12
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push
the left button. Choose Record from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
2.
Choose Alert Log from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
The Alert Log appears on the display. See below for an example.
Alert Log
Alert Queue
16-13
Alert Log
Alert Queue
1.
2.
3.
Choose Distance Counter from the submenu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
You are asked if you are sure to reset the distance and trip counters; click
the OK button to reset those counters.
16-14
1.
2.
3.
Choose Trip Counter from the submenu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
You are asked if you are sure to reset the trip counter; click the OK button
to reset the trip counter.
Introduction
NAVTEX (Navigational Telex) is an international automated medium frequency direct-printing service for delivery
of navigational and meteorological warnings and forecasts, as well as urgent marine safety information to ships.
NAVTEX messages can be read and written in the ECDIS mode.
17.2
When NAVTEX message is received in ECDIS an alert "798 NAVTEX message received" appears. To display
NAVTEX message:
1.
Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the
left mouse button to open the Main menu.
2.
Select NAVTEX Message from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Note: Lat/Lon field is a list of lat/lon coordinates found from Navtex message
using artificial intelligence. Typically such coordinates show the point or area of
interest for the Navtex message.
17-1
17-2
Introduction
Anchor watch checks to see if your ship is drifting when it should be at rest. Set the limit for anchor watch on the
menu. If your vessel drifts more than the distance set, the alert "874: Anchor watch" appears.
Alarm
setting
18.2
If your vessel travels more than the distance set here, the alert "874: Anchor watch"
appears. To continue to use the anchor watch, click the Clear Anchor button to start
the alarm from your current position.
18-1
18.3
18-2
Parameters
The Initial Settings menu in the Initial Settings dialog box contains the installation parameters, navigation
parameters and optimization parameters that define the configuration of the chart radar and operative parameters
that are either used to control steering and navigation calculation or used during route planning.
To open the Initial Settings menu, do the following:
1.
Put the cursor on the text SINGLE on the lower right corner of the information area, confirm that Initial
Settings appears in the guidance area, then push the right button to open the Initial Settings dialog box.
SINGLE
xx.xx xx.xx
2.
Set time
1.
2.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu.
19-1
19.1.1
Parameter-related menus
Use the left button to display UTC time and local time alternately.
Parameter backup
User can make backup copy of parameters. See Chapter 14 Backup Operations for details.
Installation parameters
The chart radar system parameters are set by the installation parameters.
Radar initialize
For radar initialization.
Note: Access to the installation and radar parameters requires a password.
Navigation parameters
Parameters for your ship and routes. For more information about setting navigation parameters, see section 19.1.3
Navigation parameters setting.
Optimization parameters
This function is used to define parameters for speed and fuel consumption. For further details, see section 19.1.4
Optimization parameters setting.
19-2
19.1.2
Datum is used to choose between different models of the earth. It is essential that
you use Datum in a consistent way.
If you use paper charts together with electronic chart material, it is recommended
that you use the same datum as your current paper chart to avoid misalignment
between your electronic system and points taken or plotted on your current paper
chart.
Once you have chosen a datum, all numerical latitude-longitude position values are
presented in your chosen datum.
To choose datum do the following:
1.
Put the cursor on the datum indication at the upper right corner of the display.
2.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose appropriate datum then push the scrollwheel.
19.1.3
The purpose of navigation parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship. These parameters are relative to ship
steering and they are very important to get correct function of the integrated navigation system. They must be
maintained carefully. Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters importance.
In order to edit Ship and Route parameters, do the following:
1.
Open the menu and choose the Initial Settings dialog box.
2.
Put the cursor on the triangle mark, choose Navigation parameters then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Choose Ship and Route parameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
Ship parameters
MAX speed: Maximum speed the ship can do.
MAX height: Max. height of ship above sea level.
MAX draught: Max. draught of ship.
GYRO correction
Source: Choose method of gyro error correction, auto,
manual or off.
SPD/LAT CORR.: Select On or Off.
MAX CORR.: Enter max. value for correction
MAN CORR.: Enter value for manual gyro correction.
Route parameters
MAX ROT.: Set the maximum rate of turn of the ship.
WPT approach: Set the alert time before approaching the
wheel over point.
Drift compensation: Turn drift compensation on or off.
19-3
19.1.4
The optimization parameters are used in optimization calculation. Therefore these parameters must be defined
before calculation.
In order to modify optimization parameters, do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Speed
kn
This is a very important data table that contains ship's fuel consumption with the different speeds. There are 11
different speeds available to define fuel consumption on those specific speeds. Prior to entering data in the form,
prepare the following graphic in order to find those 11 points.
Set 11 points on the graphic as explained above. Transfer those 11 points to the table in the chart radar. Use more
points where the curve bends more.
Example: 3.5 KN = 0.72 Ton / Hour HFO
Use the second graphic for diesel oil, if diesel oil consumption is relative to the speed.
19-4
19.2
Note: Use of the brilliance control (with FURUNO-supplied monitor) may adversely affect the visibility of
information on the night display.
19.2.1
You can want to adjust brilliance. You have a tool to check that you can clearly see all details of the charts. For S57
charts this tool is the color differentiation test diagram.
The color differentiation test diagram is a part of ECDIS Chart 1 and you can use it as follows:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then
push the right button.
2.
Select ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu then push the scrollwheel. The display
shown right appears.
3.
Select Color diagram from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
A diagonal line should be present in each of the twenty (1-20) boxes if color
differentiation is proper.
Color diagram
19-5
19.2.2
Set brilliance and contrast to calibrated positions. Use the gray scale test to visually inspect neutral shades of gray.
Note: During any selftest, the system becomes inoperative and this is indicated by sounding the buzzer and flashing
the lamp in the SYSTEM FAILURE key on the keyboard-equipped control unit.
To activate the gray scale test, do the following:
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area then push the left button.
2.
Select Initial Settings from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
3.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the menu, select Selftest from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
Click the OK button. The system will end normal operation and start the Selftest mode.
5.
19-6
6.
Click the Gray Scale button at the upper left-hand corner of display with the left button, and the following
display appears:
8.
Click the Exit button with the left button to close the display.
9.
Click the Exit Test button to exit the test mode. The system will then start normal operation.
19-7
19-8
20. Alerts
20.1
Introduction
FCR-2xx7 is designed to meet requirements set on paper "IMO MSC 252(83)" about use of alert concept instead of
alarm concept. Main purpose of this is to reduce continuous alarm bell ringing. In the new concept old alarms are
called as alerts and they are subdivided into 3 groups, out of which only alarm provide continuous alarm bell ringing
Alerts generated by Chart Radar are divided into three categories:
Alarm, only the most urgent alerts that require your immediate attention. Color of alarm is red and they flash
and beep until acknowledged.
Warning, most of alerts are in this category. Color of warning is yellow, in begin of warning there is a short
beep and they flash until acknowledged. If a warning is not acknowledged within 60 seconds then the short beep
is repeated.
20.2
Overview
Alerts are displayed on the ENC screen at the lower right corner, indicated with "1" in the figure below. "2" in the
figure below is the Alert Box, where you acknowledge alerts and display the Alert Queue window that shows alerts
generated. To acknowledge an alert or display the Alert Queue window put the cursor in the alert area then push the
left mouse button to acknowledge an alert or push the right mouse button to display the Alert Queue window.
There are two kind of alerts generated by the ENC. To see a list of alerts, see section 20.10 List of Alerts.
20-1
20. Alerts
20.3
20.4
20.5
Alerts generated by Navigation Calculation and Chart Calculation are common for each workstation (i.e. they can be
seen on each workstations alert queue with same alert number). Alerts generated by Radar overlay are generated
locally on workstation where failure happens (i.e. they can only be seen on workstation where it happens). Each
workstation has own alert numbers for alerts generated by radar overlay.
Alert range is: Alert 100 - Alert 109, for Chart radar number 1.
Alert range is: Alert 200 - Alert 209, for Chart radar number 2.
Alert range is: Alert 150 - Alert 159, for Chart radar number 3
Alert range is: Alert 250 - Alert 259, for Chart radar number 4
For example: "100 RadOv No Headline" for Chart radar 1 "200 RadOv No Headline" for Chart radar 2
Alerts that are generated by radar being source of Radar overlay and/or TTs are as follows:
Alert range is: Alert 110- alert 120, for radar antenna 1
Alert range is: Alert 210- alert 220, for radar antenna 2
Alert range is: Alert 160- alert 170, for radar antenna 3
Alert range is: Alert 260- alert 270, for radar antenna 4
For example: "110: TT dangerous target" for radar antenna 1 "210: TT dangerous target" for radar antenna 2
20-2
20. Alerts
20.6
The permanently visible alert is the top most urgent alert at any moment
Alerts have priority from 1 to 2 to control urgency. Priority 1 is the highest Priority 1 and 2 indicate
unacknowledged state. Priority 8 and 9 indicate acknowledged state. The "list of alerts chapters" shows the
priorities for each alert with following syntax: "/1" at the end first line means priority = 1, "/1/8" at the end of
first line means that priority is = 1, if unacknowledged and priority = 8, if acknowledged but the state of alert
still exists.
Warnings have priority from 3 to 7 with same kind of syntax as alerts. Priorities from 3 to 7 indicate
unacknowledged state. Priorities from 10 and 14 indicate acknowledged state. You may view the alerts in the
Alert Queue. Put the cursor on the alert text and then push the right mouse button. See the example below.
How to read the Alert Queue (first row as an
example):
First digit "05" indicates alarm priority.
Second three digits "712" indicate alarm number.
Third six digits indicate time.
Text indicates reason of alarm "Position source
change".
The example shows how alarm 712 changes its
priority from 05 to 12 after it is acknowledged.
20-3
20. Alerts
Put the cursor in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the menu displayed at left.
4.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose Priority Alert parameters from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
5.
Select alert for which you want to give priority. Click the Move to priority button.
6.
20-4
20. Alerts
20.7
There are a few warnings for which source is doubtful integrity. This kind of warning are "405 Log data unreliable",
"407 Position discrepancy" and " 413 SOG/COG data unreliable".
When any of above warning is active, doubtful value itself is presented using color of warning - yellow.
Following values themselves are turned yellow in upper right corner when there is doubtful integrity:
LAT & LON values of own ship position
Speed value
SOG/COG values
Following values in Sensor page turn yellow when there is doubtful integrity:
Position sensors (position discrepancy) position sensors (filter exclude)
Log sensor
SOG/COG sensors (dual axis log and position sensors)
20.8
An "ALR transmit and ACK receive" communication is available for Central Alert Management (=CAM). In this
interface all alerts are reported to CAM. This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF.
Based on rules set by IMO MSC 252(83) Central Alert Management can remotely acknowledge some of the alerts
and the rest get remote buzzer silence for 30 seconds. The communication with Central Alert management is
supervised and if fault is detected then alert "90 CALA OUTPUT CON LOST" is created.
20.9
An "ALR receive and ACK transmit" communication is available for every serial line of ECDIS. This is intended
for sensors reporting to ECDIS. ALR message from the sensor includes information about alert on sensor. This alert
is presented though the normal alert system of this ECDIS. When you acknowledge it then an ACK message is sent
to the sensor to perform remote acknowledge.
This interface is based on IEC 61162-1 and IEC 80/520/INF. The communication with the sensor is supervised and
if fault is detected then alert "ALARM SENSOR LOST including number 70-85 (depending of serial channel) and
source indication label (for example AIS, POS1, etc.) is created.
20-5
20. Alerts
20-6
20. Alerts
20-7
20. Alerts
20-8
20. Alerts
20-9
20. Alerts
20-10
20. Alerts
20-11
20. Alerts
20-12
20. Alerts
20-13
20. Alerts
/3
SAFETY CONTOUR
AREAS TO BE AVOIDED
RESTRICTED AREA
CAUTION AREA
20-14
/2/9
/5/12
/5/12
/5/12
/5/12
/5/12
/5/12
/5/12
/5/12
20. Alerts
ANCHORAGE AREA
/5/12
PSSA AREA
/5/12
ANCHOR WATCH
/5/12
TT dangerous target
2/9
---------------------------------------
20-15
20. Alerts
6/13
TT lost target
6/13
13/13
6/13
7/14
6/13
7/14
TT System error
---------------------------------------
13/13
6/13
20-16
20. Alerts
6/13
TT lost target
6/13
13/13
6/13
7/14
6/13
7/14
TT System error
---------------------------------------
13/13
6/13
20-17
20. Alerts
TT dangerous target
2/9
TT lost target
6/13
13/13
6/13
TT System error
---------------------------------------
13/13
20-18
20. Alerts
TT dangerous target
2/9
TT lost target
6/13
13/13
7/14
6/13
---------------------------------------
20-19
20. Alerts
7/14
TT System error
---------------------------------------
13/13
6/13
---------------------------------------
20-20
Installation of System
Note 1: Special attention of following topics is required to maintain "Common Reference System"
Note 2:: Origin of common reference system is the conning position on vessel.
The values of center and conning positions depend on size and geometry of the ship. .
Offsets from antenna position to conning position of position sensors depend on the location of position sensor
antennas.
Offsets from antenna position to conning position of radars depend on the location of radar antennas.
21.2
Reference Management
This radar is designed to comply with IEC 62388. The expected tolerance of the chart to radar picture is as shown
below.
Measuring conditions
Own ship position: North latitude, less than 70, South latitude, less than 70
Measuring range: 24 nm
Target range:
10-24 nm
Target bearing:
Bearing error:
Note however that the following items must be properly adjusted to meet above conditions.
Timing (Tx timing of radar echo). The procedure for adjustment is shown in "Adjustment of Sweep Timing" in
the Installation Manual.
Heading (Adjustment of radar echo heading). The procedure for adjustment is shown in s "Heading Alignment"
in the Installation Manual.
Radar ANT position (Center of radar image is the radar antenna position). Radar antenna position is input in
the initial settings.
Conning position
The chart radar uses position data fed from a GPS navigator to calculate the latitude and longitude position
of the conning position.
GPS antenna position and conning position are entered in the initial settings to calculate offset.
The latitude and longitude position displayed at the upper right side of the screen is the latitude and
longitude position of the conning position.
The latitude and longitude position shown on the SENSORS dialog box is raw position data fed from a GPS
navigator.
The chart datum used by the chart radar is recorded in geodetic datum WGS-84; therefore, the geodetic
datum setting on the GPS navigator must be WGS-84.
The center position of the range rings, EBL and VRM is the conning position; therefore their center position
is different from the center position of the radar image.
The calculation reference for TT and AIS bearing and range, CPA, TCPA, etc. is the conning position.
21-1
Gyro data
A gyrocompass is interfaced with the radar processor, however gyro data is fed to the chart processor via
LAN.
Gyro data may be IEC 61162-2 serial data, or synchro or stepper signal fed through Gyro Converter GC-10.
Serial format gyro data is fed directly from a gyrocompass, thus adjustment of the heading indication on the
chart radar is not necessary.
If synchro or stepper gyro data is fed to the chart radar, the heading indication on the chart radar must be
adjusted to match that of the gyro. For the adjustment procedure, see section 2.3.
Speed data
Speed may be input from SDME or GPS.
SDME may be single-axis water speed or dual-axis ground speed.
GPS may be used to input COG/SOG.
Ground speed may also be taken from TT reference target.
Speed is entered from the SENSORS dialog box. For details, see section 2.5 How to Input Your Ship's
Speed.
21-2
22-1
22.1
Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance program should be established and
should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Maintenance schedule
Interval
Check point
Remarks
FURUNOsupplied LCD
monitor and
processor units
Filter on processor
units
Once every 3
to 6 months
Cabling
Every 3 to 6
months
Radiator
Terminals,
connectors
Screws on
terminal boards in
processor units
When needed
6 months to 1
year
22-2
22.2
The magnetron wears with age, and distant targets will not be displayed when the magnetron needs to be replaced.
Have a qualified technician check the magnetron when distant targets are not displayed.
Consumable parts
Parts
Type
Life expectancy
Remarks
Antenna Motor
Carbon brush
10,000 hours
5,000 hours
Antenna Unit
Magnetron
5,000 hours
7,000 hours
201LHS2F
Monitor Unit
Backlight Unit for
Monitor Unit
MU-201CE
Cold Cathode
FLCL-23
Fluorescent Lamp for
Monitor Unit
MU-231CE
BEZEL (19) & LCD
MU-190
ASSEMBLY
BEZEL (23) & LCD
MU-231
ASSEMBLY
Processor Unit (EC-1000C)
Processor cooler assy.
50,000 hourse
50,000 hours
2806KL-04W-B69-B50
17,500 hours
ASYG-FAN-FU-HEATSINK
60,000 hours
Chassis fan
AD0812LB-A73GL
60,000 hours
Lithium battery
CR2032
Three years
CR-2450
Ten years
UPF250-AA-BG
60,000 hours
HDD*
MHW2040AC
20,000 hours
MK8050GACY
30,000 hours
The expected life figures are typical values. Actual life depends on usage and ambient temperature.
* Type depends on date of manufacture of processor unit.
22-3
22.3
The fuse in the radar processor unit, display unit and chart processor units protects those units from overcurrent and
internal fault. If the power cannot be turned on, check if a fuse has blown. If it has blown, find out the cause before
replacing the fuse. If it blows again after replacement, contact your dealer for advice.
Unit
Power supply
Fuse to use
24 VDC
20A
100-115 VAC
10A
220-230 VAC
5A
100-230 VAC
1A
100-230 VAC
2A
24 VDC
5A
100-230 VAC
2A
24 VDC
6A
Display Unit
Display Unit MU-190
Display Unit MU-201CR
Display Unit MU-231CR
Display Unit MU-231
100-230 VAC
1.5A
100-230 VAC
5A
22.4
Code no.
000-103-769
Battery type
CR2032
CR2450
22-4
Code no.
000-159-662-10
22.5
Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedy with which to restore normal operation. If
you cannot restore normal operation do not check inside the equipment - there are no user-serviceable parts inside.
Radar troubleshooting
If
Then
Remedy
Check connector.
Replace fuse.
Adjust brilliance.
sensitivity is poor
22-5
Chart troubleshooting
If
program won't start. "No
connection to dongle. Have a nice
day." appears
monitored route is not displayed
Then
dongle is not connected to USB
port.
Reinsert dongle.
22-6
Remedy
22.6
Advanced-Level Troubleshooting
This section describes how to cure hardware and software troubles that should be carried out by qualified service
personnel.
Note: This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis and repair down to component level
are not practicable by users.
Advanced troubleshooting
Problem
Power turned on but radar does
not operate at all
Probable causes or
check points
Remedy
1) Blown fuse.
2) Mains voltage/polarity
SPU board
SPU board
1) IF amplifier
1) Replace IF amplifier.
1) TX high voltage
protection circuit has activated.
2) Magnetron
3) Modulator board
4) SPU board
2) SPU board
3) Video freeze-up
1) SPU board
2) Gyro interface
SPU Board
22-7
Problem
Radar is properly tuned but
poor sensitivity
Probable causes or
check points
1) Deteriorated magnetron
2) Detuned MIC
Interference rejector is
inoperative (interference
rejection level not displayed)
Echo stretch is ineffective
(neither ES1, ES2 nor ES3 is
displayed)
Range rings are not displayed
Remedy
1) With the radar transmitting on 48 nm
range, check magnetron current.
If current is below normal, magnetron may be
defective. Replace it.
2) Check MIC detecting current. If it is
below normal value, MIC may have
become detuned. MIC must be
tuned.
3) Clean the radiator surface.
4) Remove water from the feeder line.
2) SPU board
3) Video freeze up
SPU board
SPU board
Trackball module
1) Blown fuse.
2) Mains voltage/polarity
3) Power supply board
SPU board
22-8
Problem
Probable causes or
Remedy
check points
Antenna not rotating
1) Antenna drive mechanism
1) Replace antenna drive mechanism.
2) Defective antenna drive motor 2) Press relay reset button.
relay (thermal relay K2,
200/220/380, 440/100 VAC)
Data and marks not displayed in SPU board
Replace SPU board.
Transmit status
1) IF amplifier
2) Signal cable between antenna
and processor
unit
1) Replace IF amplifier.
2) Check continuously and isolation of coaxial
cable.
Note: Disconnect the plug and lugs at both ends
of coaxial cable before checking it by ohmmeter.
3) Modulator board
4) SPU board
1) Bearing signal generator board
(in antenna unit)
2) SPU board
3) Video freeze-up
1) SPU board
2) Gyro interface
1) SPU board
2) Gyro interface
SPU Board
22-9
Problem
Probable causes or
check points
2) SPU board
3) Video freeze-up
SPU board
SPU board
Trackball module
22-10
2) Detuned MIC
Interference rejector is
inoperative (interference
rejection level not displayed)
Echo stretch is ineffective
(neither ES1, ES2 nor ES3 is
displayed)
Range rings are not displayed
Remedy
22.7
Keyboard Test
In addition to the color calibration tests, the system provides a keyboard test that the operator may use to check
keyboard of the RCU-020. (Other diagnostic tests are also provided, on the self test menu, however these are
intended for service technicians. For further details, see the service manual.)
1.
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the guidance area, then push the left button.
2.
3.
Put the cursor on the triangle in the menu to show the Initial Settings menu.
4.
Select Self Test. You are asked if it is OK to leave the chart radar mode and start the self test.
SELFTEST
Click OK to leave ECDIS mode
and start Selftest.
OK
5.
Cancel
22-11
6. Click the Control Head button to show the control head checking screen.
7. Push each key, button and scrollwheel. The perimeter of the on-screen key, button or scrollwheel blackens if the
pushed item is functioning normally. (For the palm control-type Control Unit, push the hot keys; their on-screen
location is in the control unit window.)
8. Operate radar-related controls (EBL and VRM rotary encoders, A/C RAIN, A/C SEA and GAIN). The figure in
the corresponding on-screen location becomes larger or smaller with control operation.
9. Operate the trackball. The trackballs X and Y location is shown in the X and Y boxes.
10. Spin the scrollwheel. Confirm that the figure in the box above the scrollwheels on-screen location becomes
larger or smaller with scrollwheel operation.
11. Click the ALARM BUZZER ON button. Confirm that the buzzer sounds. Click the button again to silence the
buzzer.
12. Click the SYSTEM FAILURE OFF button. Thirty seconds after the button is clicked the buzzer sounds and
the SYSTEM FAILURE key flashes. Click the button again to stop the flashing and silence the buzzer.
13. Click the Exit Test button to quit the test.
22-12
[Chart Menu]
Go Back
S57 Legend
Close
[Record]
Go Back
Alert Queue
Settings
Reset
[Safety Message]
Create Message
Delete Message
Send Message
Auto Disp Msgs
Close
Record
Safety Message
AIS Own Ship Info
Set Primary Display
Initial Setings
Alarms
TT+AIS
Sensors
Picture
Mark
Echo
Route Monitor
User Chart
Notes
Close
[Initial Settings]
Function keys
Operation
Installation params
Priority Alert
Radar Initialize
NAV params
Selftest
TT Test
Close
[Operation]
Go Back
Key Beep
Wheel Drive
Alarm Level
TTG Display
TTG with VRM
[NAV params]
Go Back
Ship and Route
[Route Monitor]
Select
Unselect
Close
DB: Monit., Alerts, Selection, WPT
[User Chart]
Go Back
Plan User Chart
Monitor User Chart
[Plan Notes]
Go Monitor mode
Select
Unselect
Create
Close
DB : Dia lo g B o x
AP-1
ECDIS Menu
[Main Menu]
Help
Set Std Display
[Record]
Go Back
Details Log
Voyage Log
Danger Target Log
Alert Log
Alert Queue
Chart Usage Log
Backup and Restore
Settings
Reset
[Reset]
Go Back
Voyage Log
Danger Target Log
Distance Counter
Trip Counter
Logs+Counters
MOB
Event
[Navtex Message ]
Delete Message
Close
Record
Safety Message
[Safety Message ]
Create Message
Delete Message
Send Message
Auto Disp Msgs
Close
[Chart Display]
Set IMO Base
Set IMO Standard
Set IMO All Other
Select
Save As
Backup and Restore
Close
NAVTEX Message
AIS Own Ship Info
Chart Menu
Chart Display
Symbol Display
[Route Monitor ]
Select
Unselect
Report
Close
Sensors
Anchor Watch
Route
User Chart
Notes
[Plan Monitor]
Select
Unselect
Create
Exchange with Monitor
Copy from Monitor
Backup and Restore
Report
Full WPT Report
Passage Plan Report
Close
[Chart Menu]
Go Back
Load and Update Charts
SENC Convert
Remove Charts
C-Map Ed3
Chart Catalogue
Set Chart viewing dates
Chart Permits
ECDIS Chart 1
Open Chart by Cell name
Chart Cell Status
Manual Updates
System
Close
[Initial Settings]
Set time
Function keys
Operation
Parameter Backup
Digitizer
Backup and Restore
Installation parameters
C-Map Ed3 installation
Radar Initialize
Navigation parameters
Priority Alert
Chart Alert parameters
Optimization parameters
Print Navigation parameters
Print Optimization parameters
Selftest
Presentation library
Access Server and Diagnostic
Close
[Notes]
Go Plan mode
(Go Monitor mode)
Select
Unselect
Create
Backup and Restore
Report
Close
[Go Plan (Monitor) mode]
Go Back
Go Monitor mode
(Go Plan mode)
Move Plan to Mon .
(Move Mon. to Plan)
DB: Edit Record (Plan)
DB: Current Record (Monitor)
AP-2
[User Chart]
Go Plan mode
(Go Monitor mode)
Select
Unselect
Create
Backup and Restore
Combine
Point report
Line report
Area report
Symbols report
Tidal report
Full report
Report for radar
Close
Spin the scrollwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area then push the right mouse
button.
Roll the wheel to choose ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
Choose Overview from the menu then push the scrollwheel.
4.
Spin the scrollwheel to choose desired item then push the scrollwheel.
See the next several pages for the display associated with each dialog box item.
AP-3
AP-4
Port features
AP-5
AP-6
Traffic routes
Special areas
AP-7
AP-8
Topmarks
AP-9
AP-10
AP-11
AP-12
Safety depth = 6m
AP-13
Shallow pattern
AP-14
Land features
Traffic routes
AP-15
Cautionary areas
Information areas
Lights
AP-16
Fog signals
Radars
Services
AP-17
Land features
Soundings
AP-18
AP-19
Low accuracy
Special areas
AP-20
Important text
AP-21
Light descriptions
Nature of seabed
AP-22
AP-23
AP-24
Appendix 4:
C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts
A4.1 C-MAP Cartographic Service
Your ECDIS system has the capability of using and displaying the latest CMAP CM-93/3 worldwide vector chart
database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57 3.1 specifications.
In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP CM-93/3 database, there are a number of things that must be
done.
A4.1.4 Troubleshooting
If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the following before contacting C-MAP:
That you have registered the WORLD database in the GDBADMIN application.
That the registered WORLD database is available.
That you have correctly typed the license string.
Contact Information: For information or help please call you're nearest C-MAP Office (details can be found
on the reverse side of the C-MAP chart CO box) or contact C-MAP Norway:
C-MAP Norway AS Post Box 212 Hovlandsveien 5 379 Egersund Norway
Tel. +4751464700 Fax.+4751464701
Email: technical@C-MAP.no
AP-25
AP-26
When using charts loaded and updated using CM-ENC service, on ECDIS there are not any indications on upper
right corner.
(WT)
AP-27
When using charts loaded and updated using RENC or NHO service, on ECDIS there are not any indications on
upper right corner.
(WT)
AP-28
When using any of mentioned above you will always have indication "No ENC Available" on upper right corner of
ECDIS. If there is indication "No ENC Available" you have to refer paper charts in navigation.
AP-29
Last update appl. date: Issue date of last update, which is visible on the chart screen.
Projection: Projection of the chart. The projection is always Mercator.
Horizontal datum: Horizontal datum of the chart data as published by the chart producer. By definition this must
be WGS 84.
Vertical datum: Vertical datum of the chart.
Sounding datum: Datum used for soundings.
Quality of data: Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer.
Magnetic var.: Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a
negative value indicates a change in a westerly direction.
Depth: Unit of measurement for depth.
Height: Unit of measurement for height above sea level (for example, clearance height).
AP-30
AP-31
Charts for which you possess a valid license are marked in green. Charts for which you have no license or the
license has expired are shown as red borderlines.
1. Source of Chart Catalogue
CD ROM: Display charts available in a named "CD ROM".
RENC: Display charts available from an RENC.
SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format.
C-MAP: Display charts of CM93 ed. 3 chart database stored on ECDIS.
2. View Filters
Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display.
Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit.
RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts that are cancelled in an RENC.
Group: Display charts that are member of selected group.
Navigation purpose: Display charts for chosen navigation purpose (overview, general, coastal, approach,
harbour, berthing).
3. Selected Chart
Cell: Name of the chart
Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display.
The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows:
You can view chart on ECDIS.
Green
You cannot view chart on ECDIS, because license is missing or license has expired for the chart.
Red
AP-32
A4.4.2 Introduction
Below are the steps necessary for ordering CM-93/3 professional charts.
1) Find eToken ID. See "System ID for C-MAP".
2) Define your subscription and deliver this information to your chart agent together with System ID information.
3) You will receive C-MAP database(s) on CD-ROM or DVD. Load Database(s) into ECDIS. See "Load of
CM93/3 database to ECDIS".
4) You will receive License(s) for C-MAP database(s) either in file or character string. See "License of CM93/3".
AP-33
AP-34
Above is an example where CM-ENC and CM93/3 Professional databases are loaded into ECDIS.
AP-35
AP-36
If the above dialog box appears it indicates that there is mismatch between chart database and password.usr.
Check that you have the password that is delivered to you to be used together with CM-93/3 professional CDROM.
8. You can see in License Adm dialog box listed your licenses.
AP-37
2. Add string received from C-MAP to the "License string" field then click the Add License button.
4. Close the "LicenseAdm" dialog box by clicking the X sign in upper right corner.
AP-38
When warning of license(s) expiration appears, contact your chart agent to renew your C-MAP license(s).
After expiration, charts of expired license(s) are displayed for a short period. The following Permanent message
dialog box is displayed.
Permanent message
AP-39
AP-40
3. Click the Create button then select the drive where to save the Chart Update Order file.
When Chart Update Order file is generated and saved to destination, the following dialog box appears:
AP-41
Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 in the menu. Select Update Charts in C-MAP Ed 3 menu and
Apply Updates from e-mail in the Update charts menu.
2.
In C-MAP RTU Update dialog box, click the Apply Chart Update from Files button.
AP-42
3.
In C-MAP Chart Update dialog box, select drive where updates are saved and click the Apply Updates button.
4.
When completed, the following dialog box appears. Click the OK button.
Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 in the menu. Select Update Charts in C-MAP Ed 3 menu and
Apply Updates from e-mail in Update charts menu.
AP-43
2.
Review updates in text mode and click the Review updates button.
3.
4.
5.
AP-44
6.
AP-45
AP-46
AP-47
Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 from the menu. Select Load and register for use from the C-MAP
Ed 3 menu.
AP-48
3.
4.
Close CM-93/3 Database Administrator dialog box by clicking X in upper right corner.
AP-49
AP-50
Output sentences
ABM, ALR, BBM, OSD, SSD, TLB, TTD, TTM, RSD, VSD
Data reception
Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in IEC 61162-2.
The following parameters are used:
Baud rate: 38,400 bps: HDT, THS, !AIVDM, !AIVDO and $AIALR. All other sentences: 4800 bps
Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1
D0
D1
D2
Start
bit
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Data bits
Stop
bit
no indication
HDG
SPD
COG/SOG
THS-A
HDT
GNS-A,D
GGA-1 2,3
GLL-A, D and (status: A)
RMC- A, D and (status: A)
VBW-A
VHW
VTG-A, D
THS-E, M, S, V
GNS-E, M, S, N
GGA-0, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
GLL-E, M, S, N or (status:V)
RMC-E, M, S, N or (status:V)
VBW-V
VTG-E, M, S, N
AP-51
Data Sentences
Data used is shown in bold italics.
Input sentences
ABK - UAIS Addressed and binary broadcast acknowledgement
$--ABK,xxxxxxxxx,x,x.x,x,x*hh<CR><LF>
|
| | | | |
|
| | | | +--- 6
|
| | | +----- 5
|
| | +------- 4
|
| +---------- 3
|
+------------- 2
+------------------- 1
1. MMSI of the addressed AIS unit
2. AIS channel of reception
3. Message type
4. Message sequence number
5. Type of acknowledgement
AP-52
AP-53
DPT - Depth
Recipient of sentences:
Expected nominal interval of sentences: 5 s
Alarm generated if message not received: 22 s 2 s
$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | |
| | | +----- 4
| | +--------- 3
| +------------ 2
+---------------- 1
1. Water depth relative to trancsducer, in meters
2. Offset from transeducer, in meters (see notes 1 and 2)
3. Maximum range scale in use
4. Checksum
NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transeduser to water-line.
"-"=distance from transducer to keel.
NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied
so as to provide depth relative to the keel.
AP-54
AP-55
1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
5. Mode indicator(see note)
6. Checksum
NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:
A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid
The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be
set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and
D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.
Position data shown in green in case of A=data valid and A and D; no indication
in case of V=data invalid, E, M, S and N.
AP-56
AP-57
AP-58
AP-59
AP-60
AP-61
AP-62
AP-63
AP-64
Output sentences
ABM - UAIS Addressed binary and safety related message
Transmit of sentences:
Expected nominal interval of sentences: on demand
!--ABM,x,x,x,xxxxxxxxx,x,xx,s--s,x*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
|
| | |
| |
| | |
|
| | |
| +--- 9
| | |
|
| | |
+----- 8
| | |
|
| | +-------- 7
| | |
|
| +------------ 6
| | |
|
+--------------- 5
| | |
+--------------------- 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------- 2
+------------------------------- 1
1. Total number of sentences needed to transfer the message, 1 to 9
2. Message sentence number, 1 to 9
3. Message sequence identifier, 0 to 3
4. The MMSI of destination AIS unit for the ITU-R M.1371 message 6 or 12
5. AIS channel for broadcast of the radio message
6. VDL message number(6 or 12), see ITU-R M.1371
7. Encapsulated data
8. Number of fill-bits, 0 to 5
9. Checksum
AP-65
AP-66
AP-67
AP-68
AP-69
AP-70
AP-71
Serial Interface
Radar processor unit: Input ports
Heading sensor
Baud rate is fixed at 38.4 kbps. Complies with IEC 61162-2.
Isolated RS485 Transceiver
RD-A
LTC1535
RD-B
GND
AP-72
AIS transponder
Baud rate is fixed at 38400 bps. Complies with IEC 61162-2.
Photo Coupler
82k
RD-A
HCPL061N
RD-B
AP-73
TD-B
GND
AP-74
Appendix 6:
Parts Lists and Parts Location
Parts Lists
Radar
Processor Unit RPU-016, Control Unit RCU-020/015, Monitor Unit MU-201CE/MU-231CE
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-21x7(-BB)/28x7 Series
Processor Unit RPU-016
Control Unit RCU-020
Control Unit RCU-015
Monitor Unit MU-201CE
Monitor Unit MU-231CE
SYMBOL
REMARKS
03P9339
03P9338
03P9337
HV9017
03P9342
03P9332
AC spec.
DC spec.
03P9343
03P9362
TA4726N
03P9344
TA4726N
5220.0123.1
HYPERION OBL03 131
FPI NO SW
NL128102AC31-02
201LHS02
AC1458
AC1457
5220.0123.1
HYPERION OBL03 131
FPI NO SW
FLC59UXC8V-04
FLCL-23
AC-1366
F62LM-012K-0
FAN CONTROLLER
AP-75
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Model
FAR-2807
Unit
Code No.
OZP-120-12/15-J06
26P0023 (PSW board)
Code No.
LQ231U1LW32, 26S0062
FAN
Code No.
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Model
FAR-2107
Unit
Code No.
Code No.
Code No.
AP-76
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827
SYMBOL NAME
RF
BP
MD
REMARKS
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-096
RSB-097
24 rpm
42 rpm
RF MODULE
RTR-078/A
RTR-079/A
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827
MIC ASSEMBLY
RU-9601
RU-9603
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827
MOTOR
D8G-516
D8G-571
24 rpm, w/capacitor
42 rpm, w/capacitor
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9099
FCR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827
CIRCULATOR
RC-3686 (RTR-078/079) or
FCR-2117(-BB)/2127(-BB)/2817/2827
FX00-0220-00 (RTR-078A/079A)
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9023
RT-9025
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827
MAGNETRON
MG4010 or MAF1425B (RTR-078)
MAF1565N (RTR-078A)
MG5436
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827
AP-77
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-2827W
Antenna Unit RSB-104/105
SYMBOL NAME
TB
BP GEN
REMARKS
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-2827W
Transceiver Unit RTR-081/A
SYMBOL NAME
TB
IF AMP
PWR
MD
RFC
REMARKS
AP-78
24 rpm
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-2137S(-BB), FCR-2837S
Antenna Unit
RSB-098/099
RSB-100/101/102
SYMBOL NAME
TB
IF AMP
PWR
MD
RFC
MSS
MSS
REMARKS
200/220V, 3
380/440V, 3
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-098
RSB-099
RSB-100
RSB-101
RSB-102
21/26 rpm
21/26 rpm
45 rpm
45 rpm
45 rpm
RF MODULE
RTR-080
MIC ASSEMBLY
RU-9760A
MOTOR
RM-7398
RM-7435
RM-9519F
RM-9520F
RM-9521F
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9426
CIRCULATOR
RC_6584S
PULSE TRANSFORMER
RT-9273
MAGNETRON
MG5223F
AP-79
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-2837SW
Antenna Unit RSB-104/105
SYMBOL NAME
TB
BP GEN
MSS
REMARKS
200/220V, 3
380/440V, 3
RSB-104
RSB-104
RSB-105
RSB-105
RM-7345
21 rpm: 200 V, 3, 50 Hz
26 rpm: 220 V, 3, 60 Hz
21 rpm: 380 V, 3, 50 Hz
26 rpm: 440 V, 3, 60 Hz
FURUNO
Model
Unit
PSU-007
Power Supply Unit
SYMBOL NAME
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
TB1
RELAY
HG3_DC12V
AP-80
REMARKS
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-2837SW
Transceiver Unit RTR-082
SYMBOL NAME
TB
IF AMP
PWR
MD
RFC
REMARKS
AP-81
FURUNO
Model
Unit
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7
Chart Processor Unit EC-1000C
Ref.Dwg.
Blk.No.
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD/
CODE NO.
ASSY. TYPE
2012/02
SYMBOL
REMARKS
FN 2080-6/06
GDR-H30N
FD-235HF
MHW2040AC
MK8050GACY
77.G1136.44G
ME1GU72CD2P
PCI-5S-RS-R40
UPF250-AA-BG
PCG-820GV
24P0100
24P0092
2806KL-04W-B69-B50
ASYG-FAN-FU-HEATSINK
AD0812LB-A73GL
Parts Location
Radar
Display Unit MU-231CE
FAN
(F62LM-012-K)
FAN Drive Board
(FAN CONTROLLER)
Noise Filter
(5220.0123.1)
Power Supply
(HYPERION OBL03131)
AP-82
LCD Unit
(FLC59UXC8V-04)
Inverter Board
(AC-1366)
LQ231U1LW32,
26S0062(LCD)
OZP-120-12/15-J06
26P0023
ESSIP33A-1C
(AD board)
26P0013
AP-83
Noise Filter
(5220.0123.1)
Power Supply
(HYPERION OBL03131)
Connector Board
(AC1457)
LCD Unit
(NL128102AC31-02)
Inverter Board
(AC1458)
OZP-120-12/15-J06
26P0023
ESSIP33A-1C
(AD board)
26P0013
AP-84
LQ190E1LX51,
26S0027(LCD)
Trackball
Assy.
(TA4726N)
BUZ Board
(03P9362)
PNL Board
(03P9343)
Trackball Assy.
(TA4726N)
PNL Board
(03P9344)
AP-85
RF PWR Board
(03P9348)
RFC Board
(03P9346)
Diode Limiter
(RU-9099)
MIC Assy.
RU-9601 (FCR-2117/2817)
RU-9603 (FCR-2127/2827)
IF Board
(03P9355)
RFC Board
(03P9346)
RF PWR Board
(03P9348)
Diode Limter
(RU-9099)
MIC Assy.
RU-9601 (FAR-2117/2817)
RU-9603 (FAR-2127/2827)
IF Board
(03P9355)
AP-86
MD Board
(03P9244-A)
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9205)
Magnetron
(MG4010 or
MAF1425B: RTR-078
MAF-1565N: RTR-078A)
MD Board
(03P9244-B)
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9203)
Magnetron
(MG5436)
AP-87
BP Board
(03P9347)
RF Board
(03P9349)
Motor
(DG8-516)
MIC Assy.
(RU-9601)
Isolator
(FX0157)
RFC Board
(03P9346)
Circulator
(RC-3686)
IF Amp
(03P9335)
PWR Board
(03P9348)
TB Board
(03P9349)
From top:
MD Board (03P9244)
Pulse Converter (RT-9023)
Magnetron (MG5436)
Circulator (RC-3686)
Motor (109P0824H602)
AP-88
Circulator
(FX00-0220-00)
Beneath:
Isolator (FX0157)
IF Amplifier
(03P9335)
PWR Board
(03P9348)
TB Board
(03P9349)
Underneath:
MD Board (03P9244)
Pulse Converter (RT-9023)
Magnetron (MG5436)
Motor (109P0824H602)
AP-89
Behind plate
MSS-7497 Board
(200/220 V)
MSS-7497-A Board
(380/440 V)
MIC Assy.
(RU-9760A)
Behind plate:
Diode Limiter
(RU-9426)
Circulator
(RC-6584S
TB Board
(03P9349)
Motor
RM-7398
(RSB-098, 21/26 rpm, 200/220V, 3)
RM-7435
(RSB-099, 21/26 rpm, 380/440V, 3)
RM-9519F
(RSB-100, 45 rpm, 220V, 3, 50 Hz)
RM-9520F
(RSB-101, 45 rpm, 220V, 3, 60 Hz)
RM-9521F
(RSB-102, 45 rpm, 440V, 3, 60 Hz)
Magnetron
(MG5223F)
RFC Board
(03P9346)
MD Board
(03P9244)
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9773)
AP-90
Motor*
TB Board
(03P9349)
MSS Board
MSS-7497 (200/220V, 3)
MSS-7497-A (380/440V, 3)
BP GEN Board
(03P9347)
AP-91
Pulse Transformer
(RT-9273)
RF PWR Board
(03P9348)
Magnetron
(MG5223F)
RFC Board
(03P9346)
Beneath plate
MIC Assy. (RU-9760A)
Circulator (RC4910S)
TR Limiter (TL378A)
Fan Motor (MSS-09B24DH-R)
TB Board
(03P9349)
IF Board (03P9335)
Hard Disk*2
(MHW2040AC or
MK8050GACY)
DVD-ROM Drive
(GDR-H30N), and
Floppy DIsc Drive*1
(FD-235HF)
Chassis Fan
(AD0812LB-A73GL)
AC Filter
(FN 2080-6/06)
PWR ON Board
(24P0092)
Processor Cooler Assy.
(2806KL-04W-B69-B50 or
ASYG-FAN-FU-HEATSINK)
BACKPLANE Board
(PCI-5-RS-R40)
date of manufacture.
*2 Type depends on date of
CPU Board Assy. (PCG-820GV or 24P0100)
AP-92
manufacture.
Appendix 7: Abbreviations,
Symbols
Abbreviations
Word
Abbreviation
Word
Abbreviation
Acknowledge
ACK
Maximum
MAX
Acquire
ACQ
MFDF
Activate
Act
Minimum
MIN
AIS
minute(s)
min
Antenna
ANT
MMSI
Autopilot
AP
Man Overboard
MOB
Aids to Navigation
ATON
Messages
Msgs
Automatic
AUTO
North
Available
AVAIL
Navigation
NAV
Acquisition zone
AZ
NLT
BCR
Nautical Mile(s)
NM
BCT
NMT
Bearing
BRG
NUC
Brilliance
BRILL
Own Ship
OS
Bottom Tracking
BT
Parameters
Params
Calculated
CALC
Past Positions
PAST POSN
Calibrate
CALIB
PI
CCRP
Performance Monitor
PM
CCRS
Position
POSN
CDROM
Relative
Channel
Ch
Radius
RAD
Change
CHG
RAIN
COG
REF
Continue
CONT
Rejection
Rej
Corrected / Correction
CORR
Relative
REL
CPA
RENC
CPU
Rhumb Line
RL
Course
CRS
Relative Motion
RM
CTW
Range
RNG
degree(s)
deg
Rate Of Turn
ROT
Destination
DEST
Reference Target
RTGT
Differential GPS
DGPS
Receive
RX
Differential
Diff
South
Display
DISP
S57
Distance
DIST
SAR
Dialog
Dlg
SART
AP-93
Dead Reckoning
DR
Transversal Speed
SB
East
SEA
Echo Average
EAV
second(s)
sec
EBL
Select
sel
System ENC
SENC
ENC
SOG
Estimated Position
EP
Speed
SPD
Equipment
EQUIP
Stabilized
STAB
Error
ERR
Starboard
STBD
Echo Stretch
ES
Standby
STBY
ETA
STC
ETD
Standard
Std
External
EXT
STW
Filter / Filtered
FILT
Switch
SW
Function
Func
Symbol(s)
Symb
Great Circle
GC
True
Ground
GND
Time to CPA
TCPA
GPS
Target
TGT
Heading
HDG
True Motion
TM
Heading Line
HL
TPL
HSC
TT
IBS
Time To Go
TTG
Identification
ID
Transmit
TX
IMO
Uncalibrated
UNCAL
Information
INFO
UTC
INS
Vector
VECT
Interference Rejection
IR
VRM
Latitude / Longitude
L/L
West
Latitude
LAT
Water
WAT
Limit
LIM
WGS
Longitude
LON
WOP
Line Of Position
LOP
Waypoint
WPT
Magnetic
MAG
Water Tracking
WT
Manual
MAN
AP-94
Symbols
Symbol name and description
Own ship true scaled outline
This can be displayed when based
on user selection either beam
width or length is more than 6 mm
Symbol graphic(s)
AP-95
AP-96
3 mm in diameter
2 mm in diameter
5 mm in diameter
Velocity vectors
- Radar target
- AIS target
- AIS target
AP-97
AP-98
Selected targets
Lost targets
Lost target symbol is red and it
flash until acknowledged
Waypoint
WP04
Next waypoint
Routes - Monitor
Monitored route leg lines are
dashed
Leg lines may indicate planned
speed and bearing
WP04
WP03
153deg
WP04
136deg
WP05
089deg
WP06
AP-99
Routes - Planned
Planned route leg lines are dotted
Leg lines may indicate planned
speed and bearing.
WP01
133deg
WP02
116deg
WP03 069deg
136deg
WP05
Plotted positions
Plotted position includes some
labels. Type is DR, EP or Fix (Fix
is without label).
Examples of source labels are
GNSS: G
GPS: G
DGPS: dG
Loran: L etc.
11:15
11:15
LOP
11:15
Line of position
Abbreviation is LOP. Label TPL is
used to indicate measurement
transferred by dead reckoning.
AP-100
WP04
Tidal stream
User defined tidal stream symbols
are available as part of UserChart.
Actual tidal stream use solid vector
and predicted tidal stream use
dashed vector.
11:15
1.4
11:15
1.4
Danger highlight
Route Plan, Route Monitor and
own ship Chart Alarm search area
use danger highlight to indicate
violation against user selected
dangers.
Danger bearing
Also called by traditional name
clearing line.
User defined clearing line symbols
are available as part of UserChart.
Event marker
Event markers indicate events
recorded into the Voyage record.
Man over board event has label
MOB.
MOB
User cursor
AP-101
Range rings
AP-102
FURUNO
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7 Series
GENERAL
1.1 Model
Model
Frequency
Band
FCR-2117
FCR-2127
FCR-2817
FCR-2827
FCR-2117-BB
FCR-2127-BB
FCR-2827W
FCR-2137S
FCR-2837S
FCR-2837SW
FCR-2137S-BB
1.2
Monitor
19" or
20.1"
23.1"
X-band
User supply
23.1"
19" or
20.1"
S-band
Output
Power
12 kW
25 kW
12 kW
25 kW
10 kW
25 kW
25 kW
30 kW
23.1"
Transceiver
location
Radiator
204 cm,
255 cm
In antenna
unit
TR unit
309 cm,
377 cm
In antenna
unit
TR unit
In antenna
unit
User supply
Monitor Unit
Display
Scan system
Picture
Size
Display range
Resolution
FCR-21x7 series
19-inch or 20.1-inch LCD
376.32x301.06 (19-inch), 408306 (20.1-inch)
12801024 pixel
FCR-28x7 series
23.1-inch LCD
470.4352.8
16001200 pixel
Display mode
Presentation mode
2.
RADAR/CHART RADAR
2.1
Antenna unit
Type
Polarization
Horizontal
Wind resistance
SP - 1
S-band
SN30AF
SN36AF
309 cm
377 cm
2.3
1.8
25
-24 db
-30 db
E3559S01D-M
FURUNO
Rotation
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7 Series
2.2
Transceiver
Frequency
Output power
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817: 12 kW
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827: 25 kW
FCR-2137S(-BB)/2837S/2837SW: 30 kW
Unwanted emissions comply with ITU-R RR.
0.07
3000*
0.125,
0.25, 0.5,
0.75, 1.5
M1
0.15
3000*
0.5, 0.75,
1.5, 3
0.3
1500
0.75, 1.5,
3, 6
M2
0.5
1000
3, 6, 12,
24
M3
0.7
1000
3, 6, 12,
24
L
1.2
600**
6, 12, 24,
48, 96
2.3
IF
60 MHz
Noise figure
Duplexer
Display-related specifications
Minimum range
Range discrimination
20 m w/raw video + 0-6 m w/digitize error
Range scales (nm), range ring interval
0.125 (.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75 (0.25), 1.5 (0.25), 3
(0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 24 (4), 48 (8), 96 (16)
Range accuracy
Within 1% or 10 m, whichever is greater
Bearing discrimination 1.5 (XN20AF), 1.2 (XN24AF), 2.5 (SN30AF), 2.0 (SN36AF)
Bearing accuracy
1
Radar map
Route, coastline, buoy, etc. 20,000 pts. in radar mode, 6,000
pts. in chart mode (using IC card)
ARPA/TT
Acquisition: 0.1-32 nm, 100 targets (auto and/or manual,
selectable from menu)
Vector time: 7 times (OFF to 30 m)
Time from acquisition to display: within 60 s at 24 rpm
Trail maneuver available
AIS
Complies with IMO SN CIRC. 217, IEC60936-5
Max. no of targets
200 targets; Safety messages: 100
Safety msg input
Address-specific, all ships
Data display
Ship's name, call sign, L/L, range, heading, course, speed,
CPA/TCPA, BCR/BCT, ROT, IMO no., MMSI no, etc.
SP - 2
E3559S01D-M
FURUNO
3.
ECDIS
3.1
Display contents
Chart materials
Own ship display
Other ship display
3.2
3.3
Other data
Other display features
Cursor
One-touch restore
Chart data
User interface
Position fixing
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7 Series
4.
I/O
4.1
Heading data
4.2
Speed signal
IEC 61162-1
4.3
AIS interface
4.4
Input sentences
BWC, BWR, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, HDT, RMA,
RMB, RMC, RTE, VBW, VDR, VHW, VWR, VTG, VWT, MTW,
MWV, WPL, ZDA (IEC 61162-1)
4.5
Output sentences
SP - 3
E3559S01D-M
FURUNO
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7 Series
5. POWER SUPPLY
5.1 Display unit
FCR-2117(-BB)/2817
FCR-2127(-BB)/2827
,2
24 rpm, 42 rpm
FCR-2137S(-BB)/2837S/2837SW
1
2
100-115 VAC, 1, 50/60 Hz: 3.0A /3.0A
1
2
220-230 VAC, 1, 50/60 Hz: 1.7A /1.7A
FCR-2827W
FCR-2137S(-BB)
FCR-2837S
FCR-2837SW
200 VAC,
3, 50 Hz/
220 VAC,
3, 60 Hz
3.0A
3.0A
3.0A
6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
6.1 Useable temperature range
Antenna unit
933% at 40C
6.3 Waterproofing
Antenna unit
SP - 4
E3559S01D-M
FURUNO
7.
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7 Series
COLOR
2.5GY/1.5
N9.5
2.5GY/1.5
8.
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
9365-9455 MHz
Input power
Power output
-36 dBm
Power output
-56 dBm
Level difference
3020-3080 MHz
Input power
Power output
-15 dBm
Power output
-35 dBm
Level difference
9. SWITCHING HUB
9.1 Access
CSMA/CD
SP - 5
E3559S01D-M
FURUNO
FCR-21x7(-BB)/FCR-28x7 Series
SP - 6
E3559S01D-M
Index
Backup
chart material, 14-5
chart material restoration, 14-6
loading files of former vector system format,
14-3
user chart and routes files of former vector
system, 14-3
Battery replacement, 22-4
Bearing measurement (radar), 2-17
Brill box, 1-4
BRILL control, 1-4
Brilliance
monitor, 1-4
presets for, 2-40
screen data, 2-34
CCRP, 2-41
CD ROM catalogue removal, 7-11
CD ROM dialog box, 7-9
Cell details, 7-78
Cell status, 7-78
Cell status window, 7-79
Chart alerts
alerts by category, 9-11
alerts leg by leg, 9-10
areas, 9-4
attributes, 9-5
highlighting, 9-4
list of, 20-14
objects for use in, 9-3
own ship check, 9-7
route monitoring, 9-12
route planning for, 9-9
IN-1
Index
IN-2
EBL
chart radar, ECDIS, 1-12
reference point on chart radar, ECDIS, 1-13
EBL (radar)
bearing reference, 2-17
measuring bearing with, 2-17
offset EBL, 2-19, 2-20
EBL OFF key, 2-17
EBL OFFSET key, 2-19, 2-21
EBL ON key, 2-17
Index
Gain, 2-11
GAIN control, 2-11
General page, 7-58
Geodetic datum, 1-11
Gray scale test, 19-6
Group (charts)
active group, 7-30
chart cell grou deletion, 7-29
chart cell grouping, 7-23, 7-26
chart cell removal from group, 7-28
Gyro error correction
description, 15-11
enabling, 15-12
Interswitch, 2-36
Maintenance, 22-2
Manual updates
chart objects, editing position of, 8-19
chart objects, inserting using, 8-14
chart viewing dates, 8-1
description, 8-1
displaying, 8-2
history of, 8-21
orange symbols, deleting, 8-6
orange symbols, editing position of, 8-7
orange symbols, inserting, 8-3, 8-5
planning with orange symbols, 8-2
planning with true symbols, 8-9
symbols to use with, 8-1
true symbols, deleting, 8-17
true symbols, editing position of, 8-19
true symbols, editing properties of, 8-18
true symbols, inserting, 8-10, 8-14
true symbols, modification of, 8-15
Manual updates menu, 8-2, 8-9
Mariner page, 7-58
Menu overview, 1-5
Menu tree, 1
MOB recording, 16-1
Monitor page, 11-3
Monitor mode w/user charts, 12-6
Multiple echoes, 3-3
IN-3
Index
Parameters
menus for setting, 19-1
optimization, 19-4
route, 19-3
ship, 19-3
time setting, 19-2
Parameters page, 10-8
Parts list
chart processor unit, AP-82
radar, AP-75
Parts location
chart processor unit, AP-92
radar, AP-82
Passage plan report, 10-18
Past position display
AIS, 5-16
TT, 4-14
Performance monitor, 2-39
Permanent messages (charts), 7-3
PI (Parallel Index) lines
bearing reference, 2-25
displaying, 2-25
max. no of lines, 2-26
IN-4
orientation, 2-26
resetting, 2-26
Picture freeze, 1-4
Point page, 12-9
Position
alignment by chart radar, 15-9
alignment resetting, 15-10
primary and secondary, 15-4
recording, 16-5
sensor selection, 15-2
source, 15-2
Position discrepancy alert, 15-4
Position source selection, 1-14
POSN page, 15-2
POWER key, 1-3
Power ON/OFF, 1-3
Prepare page, 10-8
Presentation library, 7-69
PRESENTATION MODE box, 2-5
Presentation modes (radar), 2-5
Printing
CD ROM contents, 7-10
font size for logs, choosing, 16-10
latest alert, 16-13
logs, 16-9
Program version number, xvi
Properties of chart object, 7-71
Publisher notes, 7-10
Pulse length, 2-18
RACON, 3-6
Radar alerts, 20-15
Radar indications
chart radar mode, 2-2
radar mode, 2-1
Radar picture setup
introduction, 2-28
programming, 2-30
restoring default, 2-32
restoring user settings for, 2-32
selecting, 2-30
Radar Target Enhancer (RTE), 3-6
Range
charts, 7-51
radar, 2-11
Range and bearing measurement between two
targets, 2-21
RANGE key, 2-11, 7-51
Range measurement
range rings, 2-15
VRM, 2-16
Range measurement (radar), 2-16
Range rings on/off, 2-15
Recording
conditions for voyage logging, 16-4
event, 16-1
MOB, 16-1
position, 16-5
Reference position (radar), 2-41
Index
RENC
authentication, 7-32
base CD ROM loading, 7-41
CD ROM service, 7-33
chart up-to-date status, 7-35
chart viewing date window, 7-36
C-MAP CM-93/3, 28
converage of service, 7-34
coverage of base or update CD ROM, 7-45
introduction, 7-32
messages in chart loading, 7-48
messages in loading, 7-49
messages in permit loading, 7-47
messages in SENC conversion, 7-50
permit CD ROM or floppy disk, USB
memory loading, 7-46
permits, 7-32
permits management, 7-37
product list, 7-32
product list up-to-date status, 7-36
public key, 7-38
security system, 7-48
subscription type, 7-33
subscription warning, 7-38
Reports
full WPT, 10-17
passage plan, 10-18
user chart, 12-20
WPT table, 10-16
Route alerts page, 11-4
Route assistant, 11-3
Route monitor page, 11-3
Route page, 7-56
Route plan menu, 10-2
Route planning
geometry check, 10-14
Route sidebar, 6-6
Routes
alerts, 11-8
alerts page, 10-6
backing up, 10-16
check page, 10-7
creating, 10-4
displaying, 11-2
ETA, 11-6
final waypoint, 11-2
monitoring, 11-5
optimization, 10-14
parameters page, 10-8
passage plan report, 10-18
prepare page, 10-8
restoring from ASCII file, 14-4
route assistant, 11-3
route plan menu, 10-2
route to monitor, 11-1
saving route as ASCII file, 14-3
speed profile, 10-15, 11-6
TO waypoint, 11-2
waypoint processing, 10-5
waypoints, adding at end of a route, 10-10
Safety contour
chart alerts, 9-2
setting, 7-52
Safety depth, 7-52
Sailing directions, 7-61
SART
description, 3-4
showing on radar, 3-5
Scrollwheel
incrementing direction, 1-15
usage on ECDIS display, 1-7
Seasonal features of charts
color coding of, 7-66
description, 7-62
Second-trace echoes, 2-33
SENC conversion
automatic, 7-15
cell status window to initiate
conversion, 7-79
display until date, 7-15
failed SENC conversion window, 7-16
history log, 7-17
manual, 7-19
progress in, 7-15
speeding up, 7-14
Sensors
alerts for external sensors, 20-20
position, 15-2
speed/course, 15-1
Serial interface
input ports, 72
output ports, 73
Set and drift, 4-17
Shadow sectors, 3-3
Shallow contour, 7-52
Ship and route parameters dialog box,
15-12, 19-3
Sidebar (ECDIS), 6-4, 6-5
Sidelobe echoes, 3-3
SPD/CRS page, 15-1
IN-5
Index
Speed
manual input, 2-10
source election, 2-8
Speed profile, 11-6
Standard page, 7-55, 7-56
STBY/TX key, 1-3
Stern marker, 2-27
Switching Hub HUB-100, 1-18
Symbol display dialog box
general page, 7-58
mariner page, 7-58
route page, 7-56
targets page, 7-57
tracking page, 7-57
Symbol page, 12-10
Symbology in charts, 7-69
System configuration, xvii
IN-6
Index
IN-7